Mercedes-Benz 2001 M-Class Operator's Manual

ML 350

ML 500

Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new

Mercedes-Benz.

Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service.

Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure, and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of time:

앫

앫

Please read this manual carefully, then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference.

Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz.

앫 Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual.

They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and occupants.

We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving.

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

A DaimlerChrysler Company

Contents

Introduction .......................................... 9

Product information................................ 9

Operator’s Manual ............................... 10

Service and warranty information .. 10

Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz automobiles ...... 11

Maintenance .................................. 12

Roadside Assistance ...................... 12

Change of address or ownership.... 13

Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada......................... 13

Where to find it.................................... 15

Symbols............................................... 16

Operating safety .................................. 17

Proper use of the vehicle ............... 17

Problems with your vehicle.................. 18

Reporting safety defects...................... 19

Reporting safety defects ................ 19

At a glance .......................................... 21

Cockpit................................................. 22

Instrument cluster ................................ 24

Center console ..................................... 27

Upper part ...................................... 27

Lower part ...................................... 28

Overhead control panel ........................ 29

Getting started ................................... 31

Unlocking ............................................. 32

Remote control with folding key ..... 32

Adjusting .............................................. 34

Seats............................................... 34

Steering wheel ................................ 39

Mirrors ............................................ 40

Driving.................................................. 42

Fastening the seat belts ................. 42

Starting the engine ......................... 46

Switching on headlamps................. 48

Turn signals .................................... 49

Windshield wipers........................... 49

Rear window wiper ......................... 51

Problems while driving.................... 51

Parking and locking .............................. 53

Parking brake ................................. 53

Switching off headlamps................. 54

Turning off engine........................... 54

Contents

Safety and Security ........................... 57

Occupant safety................................... 58

Airbags ........................................... 59

Seat belts ....................................... 64

Children in the vehicle.................... 67

Blocking of rear door window operation........................... 73

Panic alarm .......................................... 75

Activating ....................................... 75

Deactivating ................................... 75

Driving and safety systems .................. 76

ABS ................................................ 76

BAS ................................................ 78

4-ETS.............................................. 79

EBP................................................. 80

ESP................................................. 80

Anti-theft systems................................ 83

Immobilizer..................................... 83

Anti-theft alarm .............................. 83

Tow-away alarm, glass breakage sensor.................... 84

Controls in detail ............................... 87

Locking and unlocking ......................... 88

Remote control with folding key..... 88

Opening the doors from the inside ............................... 90

Opening the liftgate ....................... 91

Closing the liftgate ......................... 92

Automatic central locking .............. 93

Locking and unlocking from the inside ............................... 94

Seats ................................................... 95

Removing and installing front seat head restraints............... 95

Rear seat head restraints ............... 96

Heated seats* ................................ 98

Rear seats ...................................... 99

Third row seats* .......................... 102

Memory function* ............................. 105

Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position ........................... 105

Storing positions in memory ........ 106

Recalling positions from memory . 106

Lighting ............................................. 107

Combination switch ..................... 107

Fog lamps .................................... 111

Hazard warning flasher ................ 112

Interior lighting ............................ 112

Instrument cluster ............................. 116

Instrument cluster illumination .... 116

Coolant temperature gauge ......... 117

Display in the speedometer ......... 117

Resetting trip odometer ............... 118

Tachometer.................................. 118

Outside temperature indicator ..... 118

Setting the clock.......................... 118

Automatic transmission..................... 119

One-touch gearshifting ................ 120

Gear ranges ................................. 121

Gear selector lever position ......... 122

Accelerator position..................... 123

Towing a trailer ............................ 124

Emergency operation

(Limp Home Mode) ...................... 124

Contents

Transmission control –

LOW RANGE mode............................. 125

Switching on LOW RANGE mode.. 125

Switching off LOW RANGE mode . 125

Good visibility .................................... 126

Rear view mirror........................... 126

Electrically folding exterior rear view mirrors.......................... 128

Windshield wipers ........................ 129

Headlamp cleaning system* ........ 131

Rear window wiper....................... 131

Sun visor ...................................... 132

Rear window defroster ................. 133

Automatic climate control ................. 134

Automatic mode........................... 137

Adjusting air volume and air distribution manually............... 137

Defrosting .................................... 138

Air recirculation mode.................. 138

Air conditioning............................ 139

Residual heat and ventilation ....... 140

Rear passenger compartment ventilation and rear automatic climate control............................. 141

Front and rear air vents................ 142

Power windows .................................. 144

Opening and closing the side windows .......................... 144

Synchronizing power windows ...... 146

Rear quarter windows* ................. 146

Sliding/pop-up roof* ......................... 148

Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up roof ...................... 148

Synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof ...................... 149

Driving systems .................................. 150

Cruise control ............................... 150

Parktronic system*

(Parking assist) ............................. 153

Loading............................................... 157

Loading instructions ..................... 157

Partition net* ................................ 159

Cargo area cover blind*................ 161

Cargo floor plates ......................... 162

Roof rack* .................................... 163

Useful features................................... 164

Interior storage spaces................. 164

Cup holders .................................. 166

Armrest in rear seat bench ........... 167

Ashtrays and cigarette lighter....... 168

Electrical outlet............................. 170

Telephone* ................................... 170

Tele Aid*....................................... 171

Garage door opener...................... 180

Trip computer* ............................. 186

Contents

Operation ......................................... 191

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ......... 192

Driving instructions............................ 193

Drive sensibly – save fuel ............. 193

Drinking and driving ..................... 193

Pedals .......................................... 193

Power assistance ......................... 193

Brakes .......................................... 194

Driving off..................................... 195

Parking ......................................... 196

Tires ............................................. 196

Hydroplaning ................................ 197

Tire traction.................................. 197

Tire speed rating .......................... 198

Winter driving instructions ........... 198

Standing water ............................. 200

Off-road driving ............................ 200

Trailer towing ............................... 206

Passenger compartment .............. 211

Driving abroad .............................. 211

Control and operation of radio transmitters......................... 211

Catalytic converter ....................... 212

Emission control........................... 212

Coolant temperature .................... 213

At the gas station .............................. 214

Refueling ...................................... 214

Check regularly and before a long trip..................................... 215

Engine compartment ......................... 217

Hood ............................................ 217

Engine oil ..................................... 218

Transmission fluid level ................ 222

Coolant ........................................ 222

Battery ......................................... 223

Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*......... 224

Tires and wheels................................ 226

Important guidelines .................... 226

Life of tire..................................... 227

Direction of rotation..................... 227

Checking tire inflation pressure ... 227

Rotating wheels ........................... 228

Winter driving .................................... 230

Winter tires .................................. 230

Block heater (Canada only) .......... 231

Snow chains................................. 231

Maintenance...................................... 232

Clearing the service indicator ...... 232

Service term exceeded ................ 233

Calling up the service indicator.... 233

Resetting the service indicator .... 233

Vehicle care....................................... 234

Cleaning and care of the vehicle .. 234

Practical hints ................................. 241

What to do if … .................................. 242

Lamps in instrument cluster ........ 242

Additional indicators in the speedometer display.................... 256

Where will I find ...? ........................... 257

First aid kit................................... 257

Vehicle tool kit ............................. 257

Spare wheel (space-saver tire)..... 259

Unlocking /locking in an emergency . 261

Unlocking the vehicle................... 261

Locking the vehicle ...................... 262

Changing batteries in the remote control ............................. 262

Fuel filler flap ............................... 263

Manually unlocking the transmission gear selector lever .. 264

Contents

Opening/closing in an emergency .... 265

Sliding /pop-up roof*................... 265

Replacing bulbs ................................. 266

Bulbs ............................................ 266

Replacing bulbs for front lamps ... 268

Replacing bulbs for rear lamps..... 270

Adjusting headlamp aim............... 272

Replacing wiper blades...................... 273

Removing ..................................... 273

Installing ...................................... 273

Flat tire .............................................. 274

Mounting the spare wheel............ 274

Battery............................................... 278

Disconnecting the battery............ 279

Removing the batteries ................ 279

Charging and reinstalling batteries....................................... 279

Reconnecting the batteries .......... 279

Jump starting ..................................... 281

Towing the vehicle ............................. 283

Front towing eye .......................... 285

Rear towing eye ........................... 285

Stranded vehicle .......................... 286

Fuses.................................................. 287

Fuse box in engine compartment ................................ 287

Auxiliary fuse box in front passenger footwell........................ 288

Technical data .................................. 289

Spare parts service............................. 290

Warranty coverage ............................. 291

Loss of Service and Warranty

Information Booklet ...................... 291

Identification labels ............................ 292

Layout of poly-V-belt drive.................. 293

Engine ................................................ 294

Rims and tires .................................... 295

Rims and tires............................... 295

Spare wheel .................................. 296

Electrical system ................................ 297

Main Dimensions................................ 298

Weights .............................................. 299

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc............ 300

Capacities..................................... 300

Engine oils .................................... 302

Engine oil additives....................... 302

Air conditioning refrigerant ........... 302

Brake fluid .................................... 302

Premium unleaded gasoline.......... 303

Fuel requirements......................... 303

Gasoline additives......................... 303

Coolants ....................................... 304

Anticorrosion/antifreeze.............. 305

Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system* ......... 307

Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio............... 307

Consumer information........................ 308

Uniform tire quality grading .......... 308

Temperature ................................. 309

Technical terms ............................... 311

Index ................................................. 317

Introduction

Product information

왔

Product information

Please observe the following in your own best interest:

We recommend using genuine

Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model.

We have tested these parts to determine their reliability, safety and special suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety, performance or reliability of your vehicle.

Please do not use them.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center where you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will be performed.

9

Introduction

Operator’s Manual

왔


This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal of useful information. We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving.

For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual.

Therefore, you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.

We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle.

Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle.

If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator’s

Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz

Light Truck Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures.

The Operator’s Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle.

Service and warranty information

앫

앫

앫

The Service and Warranty Information

Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your

Mercedes-Benz, including:

앫 New Light Truck Limited Warranty,

Emission System Warranty,

Emission Performance Warranty,

앫

California, Maine, Massachusetts, and

Vermont Emission Control System

Warranty

(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and

Vermont only),

State Warranty Enforcement Laws

(Lemon Laws).

10

Introduction


Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz automobiles

Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of

18 000 miles (approx. 29 000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs:

(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,

LLC in writing of the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for its repair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than

30 calender days. Written notification should be sent to us, not a dealer, at

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer

Assistance Center, One Mercedes

Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.

11

Introduction


Maintenance

The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals.

Always have the Service Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for service. The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you.

Roadside Assistance

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance

Program provides factory-trained technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)

1-800-387-0100 (in Canada) will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives

24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

Roadside Assistance will be provided in accordance with standard program guidelines which include providing service to the vehicle up to a reasonable distance from a paved roadway. We will make every effort to assist in a breakdown situation, however, the accessibility of your vehicle will be determined by our authorized

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center technician or the tow service provider on a case-by-case basis and may be a factor in our ability to respond.

Additional charges may be applicable for a breakdown location determined not to be a reasonably accessible roadside location as determined by our authorized technician and tow service provider.

For additional information refer to the

Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program Brochure in your glove box.

12

Change of address or ownership Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada

If you change your address, be sure to send in the “Change of Address Notice” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center (in the USA) at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise.

If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.

If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used

Truck” found in the Service and Warranty

Information Booklet, or call the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at

1-800-387-0100.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:

앫 service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available,

앫

앫 unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts, gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can cause engine damage.

Introduction


13

Introduction


Warning!

G

This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both on-road and off-road use. It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel drive passenger cars are not intended. This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from conventional passenger cars in driving conditions which may occur on streets, highways and off-road use.

This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this type, if you make sharp turns at excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may roll over or may go out of control and crash. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury.

Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Operator’s Manual. Take time to become familiar with the driving characteristics of this vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Do not attempt sharp turns at excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When driving off-road or working the vehicle hard, do not overload it. And, always wear your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.

14

Introduction

Where to find it

왔

Where to find it

This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information for you, the vehicle operator. Each section has its own reference color so you can find information quickly.

At a glance

Here you will find an overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver’s seat.

Controls in detail

Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed on your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you.

Getting started

Here you will find all the information you need for your first drive. You should read this section first if this is your first

Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle.

Operation

Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehicle.

Safety and Security

Here you will find descriptions of the safety features of your vehicle.

Practical hints

This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter.

Technical data

All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section.

Indexes

The glossary provides explanations of the most important technical terms.

The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly and easily.

The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation:

앫 this Operator’s Manual

앫 the Service Booklet

Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment options installed in your vehicle.

15

Introduction

Symbols

왔

Symbols

The following symbols are found in this

Operator’s Manual:

* Optional equipment is identified with an asterisk. Since standard equipment varies between models, the descriptions and illustrations in this manual may differ slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle.

Warning!

G

Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others.

!

Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle.

i

Helpful hints or further information you may find useful.

왘 This symbol points to instructions for you to follow.

왘 A number of these symbols appearing in succession indicates a multiple-step procedure.

컄 Page This symbol tells you where to look for further information on a topic.

컄컄 This continuation symbol marks an interrupted procedure which will be continued on the next page.

->

Display

In the glossary of technical terms, this symbol is used to indicate cross-references to term definitions.

Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in the type shown here.

16

Introduction

Operating safety

왔

Operating safety

Warning!

G

Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning. Because the vehicle’s electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle.

See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center for repairs or modifications to electronic components.

Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle.

Some safety systems only function while the engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.

Warning!

G

Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires/wheels, for example when running over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole, may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road.

Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs.

Proper use of the vehicle

앫

앫

Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are familiar with the following information and rules:

앫 the safety precautions in this manual

앫 the “Technical data” section in this manual traffic rules and regulations motor vehicle laws and safety standards

Warning!

G

Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle. These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of various risks. You should not remove any of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and/or personal injury.

17

Introduction

Problems with your vehicle

왔

Problems with your vehicle

If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center management, or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses:

In the USA:

Customer Assistance Center

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

One Mercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada:

Customer Relations Department

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

849 Eglinton Avenue East

Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5

18

Introduction

Reporting safety defects

왔


For the USA only:

The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the

“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.


If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

19

20

At a glance

Cockpit

Instrument cluster

Center console

Overhead control panel

21

At a glance

Cockpit

왔

Cockpit

22

Item

1 Hood lock release

2 Parking brake pedal

3 Parking brake release

4 Left cup holder

5 Combination switch

앫 Exterior lights

앫

앫

High beam

Turn signals

6 Cruise control lever

7 Instrument cluster

8 Hazard warning flasher switch

9 Lever for voice control system*, see separate operating instructions

Page

217

53

53

166

49

150

116

112

Item a Windshield wiper/washer switch b Front Parktronic* warning indicator c Glove box d Right cup holder e Storage compartment f Electrical outlet g Horn h Headlamp washer button* j Steering lock with ignition k Steering wheel lever

Page

49

155

164

166

170

131

33

39

At a glance

Cockpit

23

At a glance


왔


24

At a glance


Item

1 Gauge for

Coolant temperature

Outside temperature

Fuel reserve warning lamp

2 Knob for

Activating instrument cluster

Adjusting intensity of instrument lamps

Main odometer

Trip odometer readout /reset

Activating Flexible

Service System

(FSS) indicator

Page

117

118

252

116

116

117

118

232

Item

3 Left indicator lamps with:

¿ Brake Assist

System

(BAS)/Electronic

Stability Program

(ESP) malfunction warning lamp

{ Electronic Traction

System (4-ETS) malfunction indicator lamp

- Antilock Brake System (ABS) malfunction warning lamp

2 Brake pad wear indicator lamp

: Low engine oil level warning lamp

Page

246

252

242

254

253

Item

/ Low engine coolant level warning lamp

ê Low range indicator lamp

? Engine malfunction indicator lamp

4 Speedometer with: v 4-ETS (Electronic

Traction

System)/Electronic

Stability Program

(ESP) warning lamp

Trip /main odometer

Display for Flexible

Service System

(FSS)

Engine oil level indicator

Page

249

252

248

251

117

232

219

25

At a glance


Item

5 Photo sensor

(adjusts the brightness of the digital displays located in 1, 4 and 8)

6 Right indicator lamps with:

W Low windshield/headlamp washer system fluid level warning lamp

7 Front passenger airbag switched off

‡ Front fog lamp switched on

Page

253

243

111

Item

_ Steering wheel adjustment not locked

< Seat belt non-usage warning lamp

1 Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) indicator lamp

É Brake warning lamp

# Charge indicator lamp

A High beam headlamp indicator

Page

253

253

255

244

254

49

Item

7 Knob for setting clock

8 Tachometer with:

Display for Selector lever position

Clock

9 K Right turn signal indicator lamp a L Left turn signal indicator lamp

Page

118

121

118

26

왔

Center console

Upper part

At a glance

Center console

Item

1 Air vents, automatic climate control

2 MCS, see separate operating instructions

3 Automatic climate control

Rear window defroster switch

4 Seat heater switch*, passenger side

5 Rear quarter window switch*, right

6 ESP control switch

Page

142

134

133

98

146

80

Item

7 Rear window wiper/washer switch

8 Rear quarter window switch*, left

9 Seat heater switch*, driver’s side a Front and rear fog lamp switch b Indicator lamp for antitheft alarm system c Transmission control switch, LOW RANGE mode

Page

51

146

98

111

83

125

27

At a glance

Center console

Lower part

Item

1 Ashtray with cigarette lighter

2 Gear selector lever for automatic transmission

3 Power window switch, right front door

4 Power window switch, right rear door

5 Parktronic system* deactivation switch

6 Storage compartment with cup holder

Page

168

46

144

144

156

166

Item

7 Exterior rear view mirror adjustment switch

Exterior rear view mirror electrically folding*

8 Central locking switch

9 Power window switch, left rear door a Switch for rear door window override b Power window switch, left front door

Page

40

128

93

144

73

144

28

왔


At a glance


Item

1 Front left interior lighting

2 Signal transmitter buttons for garage door opener

3 Front right interior lighting

4 Roadside Assistance button

Information button

5 Interior lighting control

6 Trip computer* display

7 Rear view mirror

Page

112

180

112

175

177

112

186

126

Item

8 Right reading lamp on/off

9 Automatic antiglare function* on/off a Left reading lamp on/off b Glass breakage sensor c Trip computer* control

Tow-away alarm switch d Tele Aid* (emergency call system) button e Sliding/pop-up roof* switch

Page

114

126

148

114

84

186

85

171

29

30

Getting started

Unlocking

Adjusting

Driving

Parking and locking

31

Getting started

Unlocking

The “Getting started” section provides an overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners should pay special attention to the information given here.

If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here, the “Controls in detail” section will provide you with further information. The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment.

왔

Unlocking

Remote control with folding key


1 Â Panic button ( 컄 page 75)

2 Œ Unlock button

3 ‹ Lock button

4 Release button for key

5 Š Unlock button for liftgate

왘 Press unlock button

Œ on the remote control.

All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up.

왘 Press release button 4 on the remote control.

The key folds out.

왘 Get in the vehicle and insert the key in the steering lock ( 컄 page 33).

More information can be found in the

“Controls in detail” section ( 컄 page 88).

32

Steering lock positions

0 For removing key

The steering is locked when the key is removed from the steering lock. If necessary, move steering wheel slightly to allow the locking mechanism to engage.

1 Unlocking steering

Power supply to some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment.

2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical consumers) and driving position

3 Starting position

Warning!

G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the steering lock and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

i

The key can only be withdrawn in position 0.

If necessary, move steering wheel slightly to allow the key to be turned clockwise to position 1.

A warning sounds when the driver’s door is opened and the key is in steering lock position 0 or 1.

The key can only be removed from the steering lock with the gear selector lever in position P.

Getting started

Unlocking

!

To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a possible dead battery, always remove the key from the steering lock when the engine is not in operation.

33

Getting started

Adjusting

왔

Adjusting

Warning!

G

All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before the vehicle is put into motion.

Seats

The seats can be adjusted either manually or electrically, depending on the vehicle’s equipment.

Warning!

G

Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.

Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat back reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck.

That could cause serious or fatal injuries.

The seat back and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body. Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt ( 컄 page 42).

Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.

Warning!

G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the steering lock and lock your vehicle.

The power seats* can also be operated with the appropriate door open. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Warning!

G

Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a

Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmart

TM1 compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmart

TM

system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

1

BabySmart

TM is a trademark of Siemens

Automotive Corp.

34

A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint.

Manual seat adjustment

1 Seat fore and aft adjustment

2 Backrest tilt

3 Seat height

Getting started

Adjusting

왘

왘

Seat fore and aft adjustment

왘 Lift handle 1.

Slide seat to the desired position.

왘

Allow handle 1 to reengage.

Check for proper seat engagement before driving.

Adjust seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator /brake pedal safely. The position should be as far rearward as possible, consistent with ability to properly operate controls.

i

When moving the seat, be sure that there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats.

35

Getting started

Adjusting

Seat backrest tilt

왘 Turn handwheel 2 forward or backward until your hands are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel.

Head restraint height

Seat height

왘

왘

Lift handle 3.

Use your body weight to push the seat downwards.

왘 Lift your weight off the seat to obtain a higher seat position.

왘 Release lever 3.

1 Release button

Raising:

왘 Manually adjust the height of the head restraint by pulling it upward.

Lowering:

왘 To lower the head restraint, push release button 1 and press down on the head restraint.

Warning!

G

For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.

Adjust head restraint so that the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.

36

Getting started

Adjusting

Head restraint tilt Power seat* adjustment

The seat adjustment switch is located on the entry side of each front seat base.

Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint.

왘 Push or pull on the upper edge of the head restraint cushion.

More information on seats can be found in the “Controls in detail” section

( 컄 page 95).

1 Backrest tilt

2 Seat fore and aft adjustment

3 Seat cushion tilt

4 Seat height

왘 Turn the key in the steering lock to position 1 or 2 ( 컄 page 33).

or

왘 Open the driver’s or passenger door.

Seat fore and aft adjustment

왘 Press the switch forward or backward in the direction of arrow 1.

Adjust seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely.

The position should be as far to the rear as possible, consistent with ability to properly operate controls.

i

When moving the seat, be sure that there are no items in the footwell or behind the seat. Otherwise you could damage the seat.

The memory function* ( 컄 page 105) lets you store the setting for the seat positions together with the setting for the exterior rear view mirrors.

37

Getting started

Adjusting

Seat cushion tilt

왘 Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 3 until your upper legs are lightly supported.

Seat backrest tilt

왘 Press the switch forward or backward in the direction of arrow 1 until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel.

Seat height

왘 Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 4.

Head restraint height

1 Release button

Raising:


Lowering:

왘 To lower the head restraint, push release button 1 and press down on the head restraint.

Warning!

G




38

Getting started

Adjusting

Head restraint tilt



More informations on seats can be found in the “Controls in detail” section

( 컄 page 95).

Steering wheel Steering wheel adjustment

Warning!

G

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or driving without the adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the steering lock and lock your vehicle.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

1 Lever

왘 To unlock the steering column, move lever 1 to its stop down.

왘 Move steering wheel to the desired position.

왘 To lock the steering column, move lever 1 to its stop up.

The steering wheel is once again locked into position.

39

Getting started

Adjusting

!

Do not drive the vehicle until you have properly locked the steering column.

If the indicator lamp _ ( 컄 page 26) comes on while the engine is running, the steering column is not locked properly.

Mirrors

Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic conditions.

Warning!

G

In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks.

Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or the respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary.

Interior rear view mirror

왘 Manually adjust the interior rear view mirror.

Exterior rear view mirrors

Warning!

G

Exercise care when using the passenger side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

!

Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water.

40

Getting started

Adjusting

The buttons are on the lower part of the center console.

1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror

2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror

3 Adjustment button

왘 Switch on the ignition by turning the key in the steering lock to position 2

( 컄 page 33).

All lamps in the instrument cluster come on.

왘

왘

Press button 1 for the left mirror or button 2 for the right mirror.

Push adjustment button 3 up, down, left, or right according to the desired setting.

!

For information on how to reposition the exterior mirror housing when it was forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front), see “Folding exterior mirrors in and out manually*”

( 컄 page 128).

i

With the front doors closed, the exterior mirrors can still be adjusted for approximately 30 minutes after the ignition has been switched off.

i

The memory function* ( 컄 page 105) lets you save the exterior mirror settings together with the seat and steering wheel settings.

i

At low outside temperatures, the exterior mirrors will be automatically heated.

For more information, see “Electrically folding exterior rear view mirrors”

( 컄 page 128).

41

Getting started

Driving

왔

Driving

Warning!

G

Do not lay any objects in the driver’s footwell. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in the driver’s footwell have sufficient clearance for the pedals.

During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate.

Fastening the seat belts

Warning!

G

Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained, even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women.

Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts.

If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed.

In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt. The airbags can only protect as expected if the occupants are using their seat belts ( 컄 page 58).

Warning!

G



TM1 compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmart

TM

system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

1

BabySmart


Automotive Corp.

42


Warning!

G

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body.

Warning!

G

Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt.

Warning!

G

Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the “Safety and Security” section ( 컄 page 62) and ( 컄 page 64).

1 Latch plate

2 Buckle

3 Release button

4 Seat belt outlet

Getting started

Driving

43

Getting started

Driving

왘 With a smooth motion, pull the belt from seat belt outlet 4.

Place the belt over your shoulder.

왘

왘

왘

Push latch plate 1 into buckle 2 until it clicks.

If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.

왘 If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the correct height ( 컄 page 45).

Proper use of seat belts:

앫 Do not twist the belt when fastening.

앫 Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder (it should not touch the neck or pass under the arm).

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips (over hip joint) and not across the abdomen.

Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.

Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.

Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same time.

Check your seat belt during travel to ensure that it is properly positioned.

Ensure that the seat belt is always fitted snugly. You should avoid wearing bulky clothing, such as winter coats, when traveling in the vehicle.

Warning!

G

Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They could tear.

Do not allow the belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.

This could damage the belt.

Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.

Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced.

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center.

44

Seat belt height adjustment

Seat belt height can be adjusted for the following seats:

앫

앫

앫

Driver’s seat

Passenger seat

Outer rear seats

Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder (it should not touch the neck or pass under the arm).

1 Release button

Getting started

Driving

Adjusting seat belt higher

왘 Slide belt outlet upward.

The belt outlet engages in various positions.

Adjusting seat belt lower

왘

왘

Press and hold release button 1.

Slide belt outlet in desired position and let go of release button 1.

45

Getting started

Driving

Starting the engine

Warning!

G

Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.

Do not run the engine in confined areas

(such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open.

Automatic transmission

Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission

P Park position with gear selector lever lock

R Reverse gear

N Neutral

D Drive position



왘

왘

Starting

왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P.

Do not depress the accelerator.

Turn the key in the steering lock to position 3 and hold until the engine starts ( 컄 page 33).

왘 Depress the brake pedal.

The gear selector lever lock is released.

For information on turning off the engine, see “Turning off engine” ( 컄 page 54).

46

Getting started

Driving

Starting difficulties

If the engine does not start as described, carry out the following steps:

왘 Turn key in starter to position 0 and repeat starting procedure.

Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the battery.

Get a jump start ( 컄 page 281).

왘

If the engine does not start after several starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system.

왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Light Truck Center.

Parking brake

Warning!

G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the steering lock and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

왘 Release the parking brake by pulling on handle 2.

The indicator lamp

É in the instrument cluster goes out.

Driving

왘

왘

Depress the brake pedal.

Place the gear selector lever in position D or R.

i

Wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion.

왘

왘

Release the brake pedal.

Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

1 Parking brake pedal

2 Release handle

47

Getting started

Driving

!

If you hear a warning signal when driving off, you have forgotten to release the parking brake.

Release the parking brake.

Warning!

G

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.

Switching on headlamps

The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column.

After a cold start, the automatic transmission shifts at a higher engine revolution.

This allows the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature earlier.

Warning!

G

It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

!

Place the gear selector lever in position R only when the vehicle is stopped in order to avoid damaging the transmission.

!

Do not run cold engine at high engine speeds. Running a cold engine at high engine speeds may shorten the service life of the engine.

Combination switch

1 Off

2 Low beam headlamps on

3 High beam lamps on

왘 Turn the switch to

õ.

Low beam headlamps on.

More information can be found in the “Operation” section ( 컄 page 191).

For information on off-road driving, see

“Driving instructions” ( 컄 page 200).

48

Getting started

Driving

High beam

왘 Push the combination switch forward.

The high beam indicator

A in the instrument cluster comes on.



Turn signals

The combination switch is on the left of the steering column.

왘 Press the combination switch up 1 or down 2.

The switch is automatically cancelled when the steering wheel is turned to a large enough degree.

i

To signal minor directional changes, move combination switch to point of resistance only and release. The turn signal flashes three times.

Windshield wipers

The wiper switch is located on the right of the steering column.

Wiper switch

0 Windshield wipers off

1 Intermittent wiping

2 Normal wiper speed

3 Fast wiper speed

4 Wiping with windshield wiper fluid


1 Turn signals, right

2 Turn signals, left

49

Getting started

Driving

!

Vehicles with rain sensor*:

Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on the windshield, and wipers may be damaged as a result.

The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe the windshield once every time the engine is started. Dust that accumulates on the windshield might scratch the glass and/or damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry windshield.

Switching on windshield wipers

왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on.

왘 Turn the wiper switch to the desired position 1, 2 or 3, depending on the intensity of the rain.

Single wipe

왘 Press wiper switch briefly in the direction of arrow 2.

The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid.

Wiping with windshield washer fluid

왘 Pull and hold wiper switch in direction of arrow 4.

The windshield wiper operates with washer fluid.

Information on filling up the washer reservoir can be found in the “Operation” section ( 컄 page 224).

앫

앫

!

If anything blocks the windshield wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediately.

앫 For safety reasons, withdraw key from steering lock before attempting to remove any blockage.

Remove blockage.

Turn the windshield wipers on again.

If windshield wipers fail to function at all in switch position 1,

앫 set the combination switch to the next highest wiper speed

앫 have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center

50

Getting started

Driving

Rear window wiper

The button is on the upper part on the center console.

1 Intermittent wiping

2 Indicator lamp

3 Wiping with washer fluid

Switching on intermittent wiping

Make sure the ignition is switched on.

왘

왘

Press upper half 1 of the button.

Switching off intermittent wiping

Press upper half 1 of the button again.

Wiping with washer fluid

왘 Press and hold lower half 3 of the button.

After releasing the button the wiper operates for additional five seconds.

More information on windshield wipers can be found in the “Controls in detail” section

( 컄 page 129).

Problems while driving

The engine runs erratically and misfires

앫

앫

An ignition cable may be damaged.

The engine electronics may not be operating properly.

앫 Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it.

Give very little gas.

왘

왘 Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck

Center as soon as possible.

51

Getting started

Driving

The coolant temperature is over 248°F

(120°C)

The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine.

왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and turn off the engine. Allow engine and coolant to cool.

왘 Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary ( 컄 page 222).

In case of accident

If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:

왘 Do not start the engine under any circumstances.

왘 Notify local fire and /or police authorities.

If the extent of the damage cannot be determined:

왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Light Truck Center.

앫

앫

왘

If no damage can be determined on the

앫 major assemblies fuel system engine mount:

Start the engine in the usual manner.

52

Getting started


왔


You have now completed your first drive.

You have properly stopped and parked your vehicle. End your drive as follows.

Warning!

G

Wait until the vehicle is stationary before removing the key from the steering lock. The vehicle cannot be steered when the key is removed.

Warning!

G

With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering system. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.

Warning!

G

Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always:

Keep right foot on brake pedal.

Firmly depress parking brake pedal.

Move the gear selector lever to position P.

Slowly release brake pedal.

When parked on an incline, turn front wheel towards the road curb.

앫

앫

Turn the key to starter switch position 0 and remove.

Take the key and lock vehicle when leaving.

Parking brake

1 Parking brake

2 Release handle

왘 Step firmly on parking brake 1.

When the engine is running, the indicator lamp É in the instrument cluster will be illuminated.

53

Getting started


Warning!

G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the steering lock and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake and/or move the gear selector lever from position P, either of which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Warning!

G

Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline, position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects.

Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P ( 컄 page 53).

When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel towards the road curb.

Turning off engine

왘 Place the gear selector lever in position P.

i

Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P.

On steep slopes, turn the front wheels towards the road curb.

Switching off headlamps

왘 Turn the combination switch to 1

( 컄 page 48).



왘 Turn the key in the steering lock

( 컄 page 33) to position 0 and remove it.

The immobilizer is activated.

i


왘 Move the steering wheel slightly to allow the locking mechanism to engage.

54

왘 Press the seat belt release button

( 컄 page 42).

Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate.

i

With the key removed and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds if the vehicles exterior lamps are not switched off.

Warning!

G

To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are around.

Before closing doors, ensure that there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing.

왘 After exiting the vehicle, press the lock button

‹ on the remote control

( 컄 page 32).

The turn signal lamps flash three times and the locking knobs on the doors move down.

Warning!

G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the starter switch, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

More information on parking and locking can be found in the “Controls in detail” section ( 컄 page 88).

Getting started


55

56

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Panic alarm

Driving and safety systems

Anti-theft systems

57


Occupant safety

왔

Occupant safety

In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems of the vehicle.

The restraint systems are

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Seat belts

Emergency tensioning device

Airbags

Child seat

Child seat recognition

Lower anchors and tethers for children

(LATCH)

As independent systems, their protective effects work in conjunction with each other.

i

For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”

( 컄 page 67).

The

1 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster ( 컄 page 26) comes on for about four seconds when you turn the key in the steering lock to position 2. It goes out when you start the engine. This shows that the restraint systems are operational.

If the lamp does not come on at all or if it fails to extinguish after approximately four seconds or if it comes on thereafter, a malfunction in the system has been detected.


“Practical hints” section ( 컄 page 255).

Warning!

G

In the event that the 1 malfunction indicator lamp comes on during driving or does not come at all, the SRS may not be operational.

For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Light Truck Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.

Improper work on the restraint systems, including incorrect installation and removal, can lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the SRS.

In addition, through improper work there is a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment.

Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck

Center.

58


Occupant safety

Airbags

Warning!

G

Airbags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality in certain frontal (front airbags) impacts, or side (side impact and head protection window curtain airbags) impacts which may cause significant injuries.

However, no system available today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities.

The activation of the SRS temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the airbags.

This dust, however, is neither injurious to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door.

Warning!

G

To reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags inflate, it is very important for the driver and passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear your seat belt.

For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and ensure that it is properly positioned on your body ( 컄 page 42).

Since the airbag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the airbag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye:

앫 Sit properly belted in an upright position with your back against the seat backrest.

앫

앫

앫

앫

Adjust the driver seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the airbag cover on the steering wheel must be at least ten inches (25 cm) or more. You should be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see your authorized

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Airbags and emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed to function on a one-time only basis. An airbag or ETD that was activated must be replaced.

Do not lean with your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard.

Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury when driver front airbag inflates.

컄컄

59


Occupant safety

컄컄

앫

앫

앫

Adjust the passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied.

Occupants, especially children, should never lean their heads in the area of the door where the side impact airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the airbag be triggered. Always sit upright, properly use the seat belts and appropriate size infant or child restraint system.


Mercedes-Benz authorized

BabySmart

TM1

compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmart

TM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.

1

BabySmart


Automotive Corp.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.

If you sell your vehicle you are responsible to make the buyer aware of these points. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator’s

Manual.

Warning

G

Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat. Should you choose to place a child

12 years old or under in the front passenger seat of your vehicle, you must properly use a BabySmart

TM

child restraint which will turn off the passenger front airbag

( 컄 page 70). BabySmart

TM

will not, however, turn off any side impact airbag.

It should be noted that with respect to both front and rear side impact airbags there is a possibility for a side airbag related injury if occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.

60

To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow these guidelines: (1) occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the side airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the side airbag be activated; (2) always sit upright, properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or child restraint system for all children 12 years old or under; and (3) always wear seat belts properly.

If you believe that, even with the use of these guidelines, it would be safer for your rear seat occupants to have both rear door mounted side airbags deactivated, then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written election to do so at your authorized

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center at an additional cost. Please contact your local authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) for details.

i

Airbags are designed to activate only in certain frontal (front airbags) impacts, or side (side impact and head protection window curtain airbags) impacts which exceed preset thresholds.

Only during these types of impacts, if of sufficient severity to meet the deployment thresholds, will they provide their supplemental protection.

The driver and passenger should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for the airbags to provide their supplemental protection.

In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts, roll-overs, other side impacts, rear collisions, or other accidents, the airbags will not be activated. The driver and passengers will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.


Occupant safety

We caution you not to rely on the presence of the airbags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.

Your vehicle was originally equipped with airbags that are designed to activate in certain impacts exceeding a preset threshold to reduce the potential and severity of injury. It is important to your safety and that of your passenger that you replace deployed airbags and repair any malfunctioning airbags to ensure that the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants.

61


Occupant safety

Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning device and airbag

Warning

G

앫

앫

Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Use only belts installed or supplied by an authorized


No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the

SRS, the installation of additional trim material, badges, etc. over the steering wheel hub, passenger front airbag cover, or door trim panels, and installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring. Keep area between airbags and occupants free from objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Airbags and emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed to function on a one-time only basis. An airbag or ETD that was activated must be replaced.

Do not pass belts over sharp edges.

They could tear.

Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts.

Do not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door. These items may turn into projectiles and cause head and other injuries when curtain airbag is deployed.

An airbag system component within the steering wheel gets hot after the airbag has inflated. Do not touch.

Improper work on the system, including incorrect installation and removal, can lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the SRS.

앫

앫

앫

In addition, through improper work there is a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact your authorized


For your protection and the protection of others, when scrapping the airbag unit or emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available from your authorized Mercedes-Benz

Light Truck Center.

Given the considerable deployment speed and the textile structure of the airbags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other injuries resulting from airbag deployment.

When you sell your vehicle, we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator’s Manual.

62


Occupant safety

Warning!

G

In the event that the

1 malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving, the SRS may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.

Front airbags

앫

앫

1 Driver airbag

2 Passenger front airbag

3 Side impact airbag

Driver and passenger front airbags are deployed: in the event of a frontal impact if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold

앫 independently of the side impact airbags

앫

앫

The airbags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.

The passenger front airbag will only be deployed if: the passenger seat is occupied the

7 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster is not lit ( 컄 page 26)

앫 the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold

!

Do not place objects heavier than

20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat. This could cause the front or side impact airbag on the front passenger side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system's deployment threshold.

63


Occupant safety

Side impact airbags, window curtain airbags

앫

앫

1 Window curtain airbags

2 Side impact airbag, rear

3 Side impact airbag, front

The side impact airbags and window curtain airbags are deployed: on the impacted side of the vehicle in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold

앫 independently of the front airbags

The front passenger side impact airbag will only deploy if the system senses that the front passenger seat is occupied.

The side impact airbags and window curtain airbags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.

Seat belts

When the engine is started, the seat belt non-usage warning lamp

< illuminates to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts. If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened before the engine is started, the seat belt non-usage warning lamp

< illuminates and a warning chime sounds for approximately six seconds when the engine is started.

The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in all

50 states and all Canadian provinces. Even where this is not the case, all vehicle occupants should have their seat belts fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.

Information on fastening seat belts is found in the “Getting started” section

( 컄 page 42).

i

For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”

( 컄 page 67).

64


Occupant safety

Warning!

G

Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained, even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women.

Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts.

If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed.

In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.

Warning!

G

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body.

Warning!

G

Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt.

Warning!

G

Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked.

Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Do not make any modifications to the seat belts. This can lead to unintended activation or to failure.

Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized


65


Occupant safety

Warning!

G

USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY

앫 Seat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.

앫 Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times, because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes SRS (driver airbag, front passenger airbag, front and rear door mounted side impact airbags and window curtain airbags), ETD (seat belt emergency tensioning device for the outboard passenger seats [except in the optional third row seats]), and front seat knee bolsters.

The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front airbags) and side

(side impact airbags and window curtain airbags) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds.

앫

앫

Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen.

Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these might cause injuries.

앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash.

앫

앫

앫

앫

Never use a seat belt for more than one person at time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects.

Belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to manage impact forces. The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries.

Pregnant women should also use a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.

Never place your feet on the instrument panel or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat.

66


Occupant safety

Emergency tensioning device, seat belt force limiter

The seat belts for the front seats are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and belt force limiters. The outboard passenger seats belts (except in the third row seats*) are equipped with emergency tensioning devices.

The ETD is designed to activate only when the seat belt is fastened and in the following cases:

앫 in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding a preset severity level

앫 if the restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly, see

1 indicator lamp ( 컄 page 58)

In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body. Belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash.

Warning!

G

Children in the vehicle

An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that was activated must be replaced.

When disposing of the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

!

Do not place objects heavier than

20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat. This could cause the front or side impact airbag on the front passenger side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system’s deployment threshold.

If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle:

앫 Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child and recommended for use by Mercedes-Benz.

앫 Ensure that the infant or child is properly secured by a belt at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any


67


Occupant safety

Infant and child restraint systems

Use only a BabySmart

TM1

compatible child restraint for the front passenger seat in this vehicle.

We recommend that all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion. All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s seat belt have special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints.

To fasten a child restraint, follow child restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull shoulder belt out completely and let it retract. During the seat belt retraction a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. Push down on child restraint to take up any slack.

To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely. The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner.

1

BabySmart


Automotive Corp.

68

i

Information on child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchorages

( 컄 page 71).

For information on child seat anchors –

LATCH type ( 컄 page 72).

Warning!

G

Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated.

!

The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states, the

District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.

Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured by a lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a child restraint lower anchorage system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard 213 and 210.2. A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint.

When using any infant or child restraint system, be sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant or child restraints.


Occupant safety

Warning!

G



TM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmart

TM

System installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury can result.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant.

During an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt.


Warning!

G

Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster.

When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

69


Occupant safety

BabySmart

TM

airbag deactivation system

Special BabySmart

TM1

compatible child seats, designed for use with the

Mercedes-Benz system and available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck

Center, are required for use with the

BabySmart

TM

airbag deactivation system.

With the special seat properly installed, the passenger front airbag will not deploy.

The

7 indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster will be illuminated, except with the key removed or in steering lock position 0 ( 컄 page 33).

i

The system does not deactivate the door mounted side impact airbag, the window curtain airbags and the emergency tensioning device.

Self-test BabySmart

TM

without special child seat installed

After turning the key in the steering lock to position 1 or 2, the

7 indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster comes on for approximately six seconds, extinguishes, then flashes once.

If the indicator lamp should not come on or is continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center before seating any child on the front passenger seat.


“Practical hints” section ( 컄 page 243).

Warning!

G

The BabySmart

TM

airbag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child seat designed to operate with it. It will not work with child seats which are not BabySmart

TM compatible.

Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the deactivation system. The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident, instead of protecting the child.

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation of special child seats.

When using a BabySmart

TM

compatible child seat on the front passenger seat, the passenger front airbag will not deploy only if the

7 indicator lamp remains illuminated.

1

BabySmart


Automotive Corp.

70


Occupant safety

Please be sure to check the indicator every time you use the special system child seat.

Should the light go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. If the light remains out, do not use the

BabySmart

TM

restraint to transport children on the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Installation of infant and child restraint system

왘 Guide top tether strap between head restraint and top of seat back. Head restraint must be installed and positioned such that the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of seat back.

Vehicle without third row seats

Warning!

G

Do not place powered-on laptops, cell phones and like electronic devices on the passenger seat. Signals from such devices may interfere with the BabySmart

TM

system.

Such signal interference may cause the

7 indicator lamp not to come on during self-test or be continuously lit, indicating that the system is not functioning.

1 Hook

2 Anchorage ring

왘 Securely fasten the hook 1 to the anchorage ring 2.

For safety, make sure the hook has attached to the ring beyond the safety catch, as illustrated.

3 Anchorage rings for second row seats

4 Anchorage rings for third row seats*

This vehicle is provided with three tether anchorages 3 for a top tether strap behind the second row seats.

!

Do not use the tether anchorages 4 for a top tether strap on a second row seat.

71


Occupant safety

Vehicle with third row seats*

3 Anchorage rings for second row seats

4 Anchorage rings for third row seats*

This vehicle is provided with tether anchorages for a top tether strap behind the second row seats 3 and the third row seats 4.

When using the third row observe the following:

앫 Installation of infant and child restraint systems with a top tether strap is allowed only on both third row seats plus the center second row seat.

앫

앫

When using the center second row seat for a top tether strap, the left third row seat should only be used for a child restraint system, since exiting the vehicle may not be possible in an emergency due to the routing of the top tether strap.

When installing an infant or child restraint system with a top tether strap on the left second row seat, the left third row seat should not be occupied.

!

An infant and child restraint system must not be installed on the right second row seat while a passenger rides in a third row seat. An infant and child restraint system installed on the right second row seat will prevent the use of the easy-entry/exit feature

( 컄 page 101).

Child seat anchors – LATCH type

This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) type anchors (at each of the rear seats) for the installation of a LATCH child seat with matching anchor fittings.

1 Anchors

왘 Install a LATCH type child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

72


Occupant safety i

With a child seat installed in the left rear seat, the seat belt for the center seat occupied by a passenger must operate freely. Guide seat belt between its seat cushion mount and backrest mount along outside of right side child seat mount.

Non-LATCH type child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Warning!

G

Install child seat according to manufacturer’s instructions.

The child seat must be firmly attached in the right and left side anchors 1 ( 컄 page 72).

An incorrectly mounted child seat may come loose during an accident.

Damaged or impact damaged child seats or child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a child restraint system.

Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster.

Blocking of rear door window operation

1 Switch for rear door window override

왘 Slide the switch to the right.

A dot becomes visible. The rear windows can no longer be operated using the switch in the rear doors.

73


Occupant safety

Warning!

G

Activate the override switch when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.

The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

For more information on power windows, see the “Controls in detail” section

( 컄 page 144).

74

왔

Panic alarm

An audible alarm and flashing turn signal lamps will operate for approximately

2½ minutes.

Activating

왘 Press and hold button 1 for at least one second.

Deactivating

왘 or

Press button 1 again.

왘 Insert key in steering lock.

1 Â button


Panic alarm i

For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

앫 This device may not cause harmful interference, and

앫 this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

75


앫

앫

앫

앫


왔


In this section you will find information on the following driving safety systems:

앫 ABS (Antilock Brake System)

BAS (Brake Assist System)

4-ETS (Electronic Traction System)

EBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning)

ESP (Electronic Stability Program) i

In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, the

ESP, the EBP, and the 4-ETS is only achieved with winter tires (M+S tires) or snow chains as required.

Warning!

G

The following factors increase the risk of accidents:

앫

앫

앫

Excessive speed, especially in turns

Wet and slippery road surfaces

Following another vehicle too closely

ABS, BAS, ESP and 4-ETS cannot reduce this risk.

Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.

ABS

Warning!

G

Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking. This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.

The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions.

On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even with light brake pressure.

The

- indicator lamp in the instrument cluster ( 컄 page 25) comes on when you turn the key to position 2. It goes out when the engine is running.

76



Braking

At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode.

왘 Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation.

Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS, namely braking power and the ability to steer the vehicle.

The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

Emergency brake maneuver

왘 Keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal.

i

With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS, the EBP, ESP, and the 4-ETS are also switched off.

Normal driving and braking functions are still available.

LOW RANGE– ABS

During off-road driving, a special low range system for the ABS is operational with transmission in LOW RANGE mode

( 컄 page 125).

When applying the service brakes at speeds below approximately

18 mph (30 km/h), the front wheels are locked cyclically to shorten the braking distance (dig-in effect). This affects steering the vehicle.

77



Warning!

G

The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

BAS

The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in emergency situations. If you apply the brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing braking distance. Apply continuous full braking pressure until the emergency braking situation is over. The

ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.

When you release the brake pedal, the brakes function again as normal. The BAS is then deactivated.

The

¿ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster ( 컄 page 25) comes on when you turn the key to position 2. It goes out when the engine is running.

Warning!

G

The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

For more information, see “The yellow ABS warning lamp comes on while driving.”

( 컄 page 242).

For more information, see “The yellow

BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving.” ( 컄 page 246).

78

4-ETS

The 4-Electronic Traction System (4-ETS) improves vehicle’s ability to utilize available traction, especially under slippery road conditions. The brakes are applied to the spinning wheel and power is transferred to the wheel(s) with traction.

The traction control engages at vehicle speeds up to approximately 24 mph

(40 km/h), and switches off at approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).

The

{ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster ( 컄 page 25) comes on when you turn the key to position 2. It goes out when the engine is running.

The 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v, located in the speedometer dial, starts to flash at any vehicle speed, as soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin.

Warning!

G

When you see the 4-ETS/ESP-warning lamp v flashing in the speedometer, then proceed as follows:

앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.

앫 While driving ease up on the accelerator.

앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions.

Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid.

The 4-ETS cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed.



!

Because of the ESP’s automatic operation, the engine must be shut off

(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer.

Active braking action through ESP may otherwise seriously damage the front or rear axle brake system.

Operational tests with the engine running can only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer.

i

If the yellow 4-ETS malfunction indicator lamp

{ comes on while the

4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v flashes, the electronic traction system is being switched off temporarily to prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes.

79



LOW RANGE 4-ETS

During off-road driving, a special low range system for the 4-ETS is operational with transmission in LOW RANGE mode.


“Practical hints” section ( 컄 page 242) and

( 컄 page 252).

EBP

The EBP enhances braking effectiveness by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion of the braking effort without a loss of vehicle stability.

ESP

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface) and handling.

The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting engine output, the ESP works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces.

The 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer flashes when the ESP is engaged.

The

¿ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster ( 컄 page 25) and the 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer come on when you turn the key to position 2. They go out when the engine is running.

Warning!

G

Never switch off the ESP when you see the

4-ETS/ESP-warning lamp v flashing in the speedometer. In this case, proceed as follows:

앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.

앫 While driving, ease up on the accelerator.

앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions.

Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid.

The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed.

80



Warning!

G

The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

!

Because of the ESP’s automatic operation, the engine must be shut off

(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer.

Active braking action through ESP may otherwise seriously damage the front or rear axle brake system.

Operational tests with the engine running can only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer.

Switching off the ESP

Warning!

G

The ESP should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers.

LOW RANGE – ESP

During off-road driving, a special low range system for the ESP is operational with transmission in LOW RANGE mode

( 컄 page 125).

In the LOW RANGE mode, the ESP operates in a traction improving fashion specifically adapted for off-road driving. At speeds below 27 mph (45 km/h), the ESP assists in over-/understeering, thus improving vehicle traction.

앫

앫

To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off the ESP in driving situations where it would be advantageous to have the drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as:

앫 starting out on slippery surfaces and in deep snow in conjunction with snow chains in sand or gravel when driving off-road

81



82

!

Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period with the ESP switched off. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

The switch is located in the upper center console.

i

Turn ESP on immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore.

Traction control brakes a spinning wheel even when the ESP is deactivated.

The ESP always operates when you are braking, even when it has been deactivated.

ESP on/off switch

왘 Press upper half of the ESP switch.

The 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer comes on.

The ESP is deactivated.

If one or more drive wheels are spinning, the 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer flashes, regardless of the speed.

Warning!

G

When the 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v is illuminated continuously, the ESP is switched off.

Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating status of the ESP.

Switching on the ESP

왘 Press lower half of the ESP switch until the 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer goes out.

You are now again in normal driving mode.

For more information, see “Practical hints”

( 컄 page 241).



왔


Immobilizer

The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle.

Activating

Removing the key from the steering lock activates the immobilizer.

Deactivating

Turning the key in the steering lock to position 2 ( 컄 page 33) deactivates the immobilizer.

i

In case the engine cannot be started

(vehicle’s battery is in order), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck

Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes

(in the USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in

Canada).

Anti-theft alarm

앫

앫

Once the alarm system has been armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone:

앫 opens a door opens the liftgate opens the hood

앫

앫

The alarm will stay on even if the activating element (a door, for example) is immediately closed.

The alarm system will also be triggered when someone attempts to raise the vehicle unlocking and opening the driver’s door with the mechanical key i

If the alarm stays on for more than

20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid* system ( 컄 page 171) provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available.

Arming the alarm system

The alarm system is armed after locking the vehicle with the remote control. The turn signal lamps flash three times to indicate that the alarm system is activated. A red lamp in the center console will flash after approximately 10 seconds when the alarm system is completely armed

( 컄 page 27).

83



앫

앫 i

If the turn signal lamps do not flash three times, the tow-away - glass breakage sensor is malfunctioning or one of the following elements may not be properly closed:

앫 a door the liftgate the hood

Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again.

Disarming the alarm system

The alarm system is disarmed when you unlock your vehicle with the remote control. The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is deactivated.

i

The alarm system will rearm automatically again after approximately

40 seconds if one of the doors or the liftgate is not opened.

Canceling the alarm

To cancel the alarm:

왘 Switch on the ignition by turning the key in the steering lock to position 2.

or

왘 Press the

Œ or ‹ button on the remote control.

The alarm is canceled.

Tow-away alarm, glass breakage sensor

The tow-away alarm and the glass breakage sensor are part of the anti-theft alarm system.

Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual and audible alarm will be triggered when someone:

앫 attempts to raise the vehicle

앫 breaks a window and reaches into the passenger compartment i

The tow-away protection alarm is triggered, for example, if the vehicle is lifted on one side.

If the alarm stays on for more than

20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid* system ( 컄 page 171) provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available.

84



Arming tow-away alarm and glass breakage sensor

When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away and glass breakage sensor alarm is automatically armed.

Vehicles with trip computer*

The buttons are located in the overhead control panel.

Disarming tow-away alarm and glass breakage sensor

To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm feature, switch off the tow-away alarm and glass breakage sensor before towing the vehicle, or when parking on a surface subject to movement, such as a ferry or auto train.

1 Reset button

2 Mode button

3 Display

4 Glass breakage sensor

왘 Turn key in steering lock to position 2

( 컄 page 33).

왘 Return key to position 0 and remove it from the steering lock.

왘 Within 30 seconds press button 1 or 2.

The display shows OFF .

왘 Exit vehicle and lock vehicle with remote control ( 컄 page 32).

The tow-away alarm and glass breakage sensor remain switched off until the key is inserted in steering lock and turned to position 1.

85



Vehicles without trip computer

The buttons are located in the overhead control panel.

1 Switching off tow-away alarm and glass breakage sensor


( 컄 page 33).

왘 Return key to position 0 and remove it from the steering lock.

왘 Within 30 seconds press button 1 on the right or left side.

왘 Exit vehicle and lock vehicle with remote control ( 컄 page 32).

The tow-away alarm and glass breakage sensor remain switched off until the key is inserted in steering lock and turned to position 1.

Canceling the alarm

To cancel the alarm:

왘 Switch on the ignition by turning the key in the steering lock to position 2.

or

왘 Press the

Œ or ‹ button on the remote control.

The alarm is canceled.

86

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

Seats

Memory function*

Lighting



Transmission control – LOW RANGE mode

Good visibility

Automatic climate control

Power windows

Sliding/pop-up roof*

Driving systems

Loading

Useful features

87



In the “Controls in detail” section you will find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed in your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you.

To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the

“Getting started” section of this manual.

The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment.

왔



Your vehicle comes supplied with two remote controls with folding key.

The remote control provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it.

앫

앫

The key centrally locks and unlocks:

앫 the doors the liftgate the fuel filler flap i

If the key is inserted in the steering lock, the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked with the remote control.

1 Â Panic button ( 컄 page 75)

2 Œ Unlock button

3 ‹ Lock button

4 Release button for key

5 Š Unlock button for liftgate

!

To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the remote control to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.

88



Unlocking i

Unlocking the vehicle with the remote control deactivates the anti-theft alarm.

The vehicle will lock again automatically and reactivate the anti-theft system within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if neither door nor liftgate is opened.

Global unlocking

왘 Press button

Œ twice.

All turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that all doors, fuel filler flap and liftgate are unlocked.

Unlocking the liftgate

왘 Press button

Š.

Only the liftgate unlocks.

Unlocking the driver’s door and fuel filler flap

왘 Press button

Œ once.

All turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked.

Locking i

Locking the vehicle with the remote control activates the anti-theft alarm.

왘 Press button

‹ once.

All turn signal lamps flash three times to indicate that all doors, the liftgate and the fuel filler flap are locked.

앫

앫 i

If the turn signal lamps do not flash three times, one of the following elements may not be properly closed:

앫 a door the liftgate the hood

Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again.

Warning!

G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the steering lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and / or serious personal injury.

89



!

If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the remote control, then the batteries in the remote control are discharged, the remote control is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained.

앫

앫

앫

앫

Check the batteries in the remote control and replace them if necessary ( 컄 page 262).

Use the folding key to unlock or lock the doors and the liftgate.

Check the vehicle battery

( 컄 page 278).

Synchronize the remote control

( 컄 page 263).

If the remote control is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Light Truck Center.

Loss of remote control with folding key

If you lose a remote control or the folding key, you should do the following:

왘 Have the remote control deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center.

왘 Report the loss of the remote control or the folding key immediately to your car insurance company.

왘 If necessary have the mechanical lock replaced.

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center will be glad to supply you with a replacement.

Opening the doors from the inside

You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so.

1 Locking knob

2 Inside door handle

왘 Pull on door handle 2.

If a door was locked, locking knob 1 will move up.

90


Locking and unlocking i

If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside with the remote control, opening a door from the inside will trigger the alarm.

To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:

Switch on the ignition by turning the key in the steering lock to position 2.

or

Press the

‹ or Œ button on the remote control.

The alarm is cancelled.

Opening the liftgate

Opening the liftgate from outside

A minimum height clearance of 7 ft

(2.15 m) is required to open the liftgate.

The handle is located above the rear license plate recess.

!

Always make sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance.

i

The vehicle must be unlocked.

Opening the liftgate from inside

A minimum height clearance of 7 ft

(2.15 m) is required to open the liftgate.

The release lever is located on the inside of the liftgate.

1 Grip molding

2 Handle

왘 Pull on handle 2.

왘 Swing the liftgate upward by using the grip molding.

1 Handle

2 Catch

91



왘

왘

To unlock the liftgate, move the catch 2 to the right.

Pull handle 1 down and swing liftgate upward.

!

Always make sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance.

Closing the liftgate i

To lock the liftgate, move the catch 2 to the left.

Warning!

G

1 Recessed grip

2 Grip molding

왘

왘

Pull down on recessed grip 1.

Close liftgate by using grip molding 2.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the steering lock and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. Children could open the liftgate from inside, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Warning!

G

To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the liftgate opening when closing the liftgate. Be especially careful when small children are around.

Do not close the liftgate from the inside by pulling on the handle.

Warning!

G

Only drive with the liftgate closed as exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.

i

To prevent an inadvertent lockout, do not place the key in the cargo compartment.

92



Automatic central locking

The doors and the liftgate automatically lock when the ignition is switched on and the left front wheel turns at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.

If one of the front doors is then opened from the inside, the vehicle is unlocked centrally unless only the driver's door was previously unlocked.

i

The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold.

앫

앫

To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking, deactivate the automatic central locking when the vehicle is pushed or towed is on a test stand

Information on towing the vehicle can be found in the “Practical hints” section

( 컄 page 241).

The switch is located on the lower center console.

Central locking switch

1 Locking

2 Unlocking

Activating


왘

All the lamps in the instrument cluster light up.

Press and hold upper part 1 of the central locking button for approximately six seconds.

The automatic central locking is activated.

Deactivating


왘


Press and hold lower part 2 of the central locking button for approximately six seconds.

The automatic central locking is deactivated.

93



Locking and unlocking from the inside

You can lock or unlock the doors and the tailgate from inside using the central locking switch. This can be useful, for example, if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive.

Locking

왘 Press upper part 1 of central locking button ( 컄 page 93).

If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.

Warning!

G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the steering lock and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Unlocking

왘 Press lower part 2 of central locking button ( 컄 page 93).

The vehicle unlocks.

i

You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so.

If the vehicle was previously centrally locked using the remote control, it will not unlock using the central locking switch.

94


Seats

왔

Seats

Information on seat adjustment can be found in the “Getting started” section

( 컄 page 34).

Removing and installing front seat head restraints

Information on head restraint adjustment can be found in the “Getting started” section ( 컄 page 34).

Warning!

G




Do not interchange head restraints from front and rear seat.

Front seat head restraints

Removing head restraints

왘 Pull head restraint to its highest position.

왘 Push button 1 and pull out head restraint.

95


Seats

Installing head restraint

왘 Insert head restraint and push it down to the stop.

왘 Push button 1 and adjust head restraint to the desired position

( 컄 page 36).

Raising:


Lowering:

왘 To lower the head restraint, push button 1 and press down on the head restraint.

Head restraint tilt

Rear seat head restraints

G

Head restraint height

Warning!






More informations on seats can be found in the “Getting started” section

( 컄 page 34).

96


Seats

Removing and installing rear seat head restraints

Warning!

G




Do not interchange head restraints from front and rear seat.

Installing rear seat head restraints

왘 Insert head restraint and push it down to the stop.

왘 Push button 1 and adjust head restraint to the desired position

( 컄 page 36).

Stowing rear center head restraint

Removing rear seat head restraints

왘 Pull head restraint to its highest position.

왘 Push button 1 and pull out head restraint.

i

For a better view toward the rear, you can store the rear center head restraint underneath the rear seat ( 컄 page 97).

1 Rear center head restraint

2 Bar

3 Clip 컄컄

97


Seats

컄컄 왘 Remove rear center head restraint

( 컄 page 96).

왘 If necessary, remove cargo floor plates, see “Removing cargo floor plates”

( 컄 page 162).

왘 Slide rear seats forward, see “Adjusting rear seat fore and aft” ( 컄 page 99).

왘 Fold rear seat backrests down, see

“Folding down the backrest”

( 컄 page 100).

왘 From cargo compartment, attach rear center head restraint 1 to underside of rear center seat.

왘

Make sure front side of head restraint 1 is facing upward.

Press bar 2 on both sides into clips 3.

Heated seats*

Both switches for the front seats are located in the center console.

1 Normal heating

2 Rapid heating

왘 Start the engine.

Switching on seat heating

왘 Press upper switch position 1.

A red indicator lamp on the switch lights up.

Switching off seat heating

왘 Press upper switch position 1 again.

The indicator lamp on the switch turns off.

i

The seat heater will be automatically switched off after approximately

20 minutes.

Switching on rapid seat heating

왘 Press lower switch position 2.

Both red indicator lamps on the switch turn on.

i

The system switches over to normal heating mode after approximately five minutes. Only one red indicator lamp remains on.

98


Seats

Switching off rapid seat heating

왘 Press lower switch position 2 again.

Both red indicator lamps on the switch turn off.

!

If one or both of the lamps on the seat heater switch are flashing, there is insufficient voltage available since too many electrical consumers are turned on. The seat heater switches off automatically.

The seat heater will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.

Rear seats

Warning!

G

Do not adjust the rear seats while driving.

Always seat in an upright position and the seat belts are properly positioned on the body. Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt.

Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head approximately at ear level.

Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.

앫

앫

앫

The rear seats are divided asymmetrically.

To enlarge the cargo area you can adjust the left and right part separately. The following changes are possible: moving the seat fore and aft folding down the backrest lowering the seat

Adjusting rear seat fore and aft

1 Release lever

왘 Pull release lever 1 in direction of arrow.

왘 Slide seat to the desired position until it locks in place.

Warning!

G

Failure to assure that seats are locked into place could result in an increased chance of injury in an accident.

99


Seats

Folding down the backrest

1 Lock button

왘 Close cup holder ( 컄 page 167) and ashtray ( 컄 page 169) in rear center console ( 컄 page 167).

왘 Move front seats forward. Manual seat

( 컄 page 35) or power seat ( 컄 page 37).

왘

왘

왘

Slide seat forward.

Remove head restraint(s) ( 컄 page 95).

Pull lock button 1 up and fold backrest forward until it locks in place.

The red backrest lock indicator at lock button 1 is not visible in the locked position.

Folding up the backrest

왘 Close cup holder ( ashtray ( 컄 page 169) in rear center console.

컄 page 167) and

왘 Pull lock button 1 up and unfold backrest until it locks in place.

Make sure the seat belt is not caught in the seat.

왘 Check for secure locking by pulling and pushing on the backrest.

The red backrest lock indicator at lock button 1 is not visible in the locked position.

왘 Install head restraint ( 컄 page 96).

왘 Slide seat rearward to desired position

( 컄 page 99).

왘 Adjust front seats to desired position.

Manual seats ( 컄 page 35) or power seats ( 컄 page 37).

Lowering the rear seat

1 Release button

2 Lever

3 Release lever

100


Seats

왘

왘

Close cup holder in rear center console

( 컄 page 167).

Move front seats forward. Manual seat


왘

왘

왘

왘

왘 Press and hold release button 1 to unlock lever 2.

Pull lever 2 in direction of arrow.

Pull release lever 3 and push down rear seat until it locks in place.

Fold down the backrest ( 컄 page 100).

Adjust front seats to desired position.

Manual seats ( 컄 page 35) or power seats ( 컄 page 37).

Folding up the rear seat

왘 Move front seats forward. Manual seat


왘 Pull release lever 3 and raise rear seat until it locks in place.

Warning!

G


Easy entry/ exit feature*

The easy entry/exit feature allows access to the third row seats*. The right cargo floor plate must be removed ( 컄 page 162).

Warning!

G

Never drive with the second row right seat folded forward (easy entry /exit feature). It could open and fold back unintentionally.

Folding rear seat forward

왘

왘

1 Lever

왘 Move right seat forward. Manual seats

( 컄 page 35) or power seats

( 컄 page 37).

Move rear seat forward ( 컄 page 99).

Push head restraint fully down and tilt it forward.

왘

왘

Fold backrest forward ( 컄 page 100).

Pull lever 1 up and fold the rear seat forward.

101


Seats

Resetting rear seat 왘 Move the rear and front seats in desired position.

왘 Pull up and adjust head restraint

( 컄 page 36).

Third row seats*

Folding down single seat

왘 Pull down on seat bench until it locks into place.

왘 Pull lock button 1 ( 컄 page 100) up and unfold backrest until it locks into place.

왘 Check for secure locking by pulling and pushing on the backrest.

The red backrest lock indicator at lock button 1 ( 컄 page 100) is not visible in the locked position.

Warning!

G


Adjust head restraint so that head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level.

This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.


Never place hands under seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.

1 Head restraint

2 Hook

3 Tensioner

4 Hook and loop velcro strip

왘 Remove cargo floor plate

( 컄 page 162).

왘 Remove head restraint 1 from seat cushion.

왘 Lift tensioner 3 upward to a horizontal position to release tension of the belt.

왘 Disengage hook 2 while holding onto the seat firmly with one hand.

102


Seats

왘 Attach belt at hook and loop velcro strip 4 ( 컄 page 102) on underside of seat.

왘 Install head restraint 1 in backrest

( 컄 page 102).

Storing single seat

5 Backrest release

6 Seat release

왘 Fold seat down until it locks securely in place.

왘

The red marking on the seat release 6 should not be visible.

Store cargo floor plates inside the backrest ( 컄 page 162).

왘 Pull backrest release 5 and unfold backrest until it locks securely in place.

왘 Remove head restraint from backrest

( 컄 page 102).

왘

왘

왘

Pull backrest release 5 and fold backrest forward until it locks securely in place.

Remove cargo floor plates from the backrest.

Pull seat release 6 ( 컄 page 103) and fold seat up.

왘

왘

왘 Disengage belt and engage hook 2

( 컄 page 102) in ceiling mount.

Pull on free end of belt until tight.

왘

Install head restraint in openings provided in seat cushion.

Install cargo floor plates ( 컄 page 162).

Warning!

G

After folding the seats up, manually place the lap belt portion of the seat belt behind the seat (arrow). Otherwise, the lap belt may be subject to damage and could rip.

103


Seats

Removing single seat

1 Hook

2 Tensioner

3 Hook and loop velcro strip

4 Release lever

왘 Lift tensioner 2 upward to a horizontal position to release tension of the belt.

왘 Disengage hook 1 while holding onto the seat firmly with one hand.

왘 Attach belt at hook and loop strip 3 on underside of seat.

왘 Move release lever 4 upward and remove seat.

Installing single seat

왘 Place seat into the mounting clamps and click the seat into place.

104


Memory function*

왔

Memory function*

!

Prior to operating the vehicle the driver should check and adjust the seat height, seat position fore and aft, and seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height. See also the section on airbags ( 컄 page 59) for proper seat positioning.

In addition, adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the inside and outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision.

Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard 213 and 225 and Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and

210.2.

With the memory button you can store up to three different settings for the driver- and passenger seat.

Together with the driver’s seat you can store the exterior rear view mirrors.

For the front passenger seat you can store the seat position.

Warning!

G

Do not activate the memory function while driving. Activating the memory function while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position

For easier parking, you can adjust the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so that you can see the right rear wheel as soon as you engage reverse gear R.

For information on activating the parking position feature, see “Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position”

( 컄 page 127).

1 Position buttons

2 Memory button

105


Memory function*

Storing parking position

왘 Stop the vehicle.

왘

왘

Switch on ignition (if not already on).

Press button 2.

The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror is selected.

왘 Adjust the exterior rear view mirror with button 3 so that you see the rear wheel and the road curb.

왘

왘

Press memory button 2 ( 컄 page 105).

Within three seconds, press bottom of adjustment button 3.

The parking position is stored if the mirror does not move.

i

If the mirror does move, repeat the above steps. After the setting is stored you can move the mirror again.

The selected position will be stored relative to the position button 1

( 컄 page 105) pressed.

Storing positions in memory

왘

왘

왘

Adjust the seat ( 컄 page 37) and exterior rear view mirrors ( 컄 page 40) to the desired position.

Push memory button 2 ( 컄 page 105).

Release memory button and press one of the position buttons 1 within three seconds.

All the settings are stored at the selected position.

Recalling positions from memory

!

Do not operate the power seats using the memory button if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined position.

Doing so could cause damage to front or rear seats.

왘 Press and hold one of the position buttons 1 until seat and rear view mirrors have fully moved to the stored positions.

i

Releasing the button immediately stops movement to the stored positions.

106


Lighting

왔

Lighting

For notes on how to switch on the headlamps ( 컄 page 48) and use the turn signals

( 컄 page 49), see the “Getting started” section.

i

If you drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country where the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams.

Relevant information can be obtained at your authorized Mercedes-Benz

Light Truck Center.


The combination switch is on the left of the steering column.

1 High beam

2 High beam flasher

M Off

U Automatic headlamp mode

C Parking lamps, license plate lamps and instrument panel lamps

Canada only: With the engine running, the low beam headlamps additionally switched on.

õ Low beam or high beam headlamps

ƒ Left or right standing lamps

(symbol on underside of switch)

107


Lighting i

If you remove the key and open the driver’s door while the parking lamps or low beam headlamps are switched on, then a warning sounds.

Manual headlamp mode

The low beam headlamps and parking lamps can be switched on and off with the combination switch. For combination switch, see ( 컄 page 107).

Automatic headlamp mode

The parking lamps, low beam headlamps and license plate lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

왘 Turn the combination switch to

U.

Warning!

G

If the combination switch is set to

U,

앫 the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from oncoming traffic.

앫 the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions.

To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning combination switch to

õ when driving or when traffic and/or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so.

In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch from position

U to õ with the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from

U to

õ will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle's lights at all times.

i

If the automatic headlamp mode is activated, the fog lamps can also be switched on ( 컄 page 111). The low beam headlamp and parking lamps are activated simultaneously.

108


Lighting

Daytime running lamp mode

Canada only:

왘 Turn combination switch to position

M or U.

When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps are automatically switched on.

In low ambient light conditions, the parking lamps will also switch on.

When you shift from a driving position to position N or P, the low beam switches off

(three minutes delay).

For nighttime driving you should turn the combination switch to position

õ to permit activation of the high beam headlamps.

i

The high beam flasher is always available.

앫

앫

앫

앫

Night security illumination

When you turn off the engine and the last door has been closed, the following lamps will remain lit:

Parking lamps

Tail lamps

License plate lamps

Front fog lamps

The combination switch must be set to position

U ( 컄 page 107).

i

You can reactivate this function within ten minutes by opening a door or the liftgate.

If you do not open a door or the liftgate after turning off the engine, the lamps will automatically switch off after

60 seconds.

Deactivating night security illumination temporarily

왘 Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key in the steering lock to position 0

( 컄 page 33) then turn it to position 2 and back to 0.

The night security illumination is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you start the engine.

Setting illumination time

1 Switch for fog lamps

109


Lighting

왘

왘

Stop the vehicle.

Make sure the ignition is switched on.

왘 Turn combination switch to position

M.

왘


Press upper part 1 of switch until the clock, located in the instrument cluster, displays the actual illumination time.

왘 Press upper part 1 of switch again.

Each time the switch is pressed, the illumination time increases by

15 seconds. You can set the illumination time between 0 (off) and

60 seconds.

Approximately five seconds after pressing the switch, the illumination time is set and the clock is displayed again.

앫

앫

앫

앫

Locator lighting

During darkness, the following lamps will come on when the vehicle is unlocked by remote control:

Parking lamps

Tail lamps

License plate lamps

Front fog lamps

The combination switch must be set to position

U ( 컄 page 107).

The locator lighting switches off when the driver’s door is opened. It switches off automatically after a period of approximately

40 seconds.

Switching on high beams

왘 Turn the combination switch to

õ( 컄 page 107).

왘 Push the combination switch forward.

The high beam indicator

A in the instrument cluster comes on.

High beam flasher

왘 Pull the combination switch briefly in direction 2.

110


Lighting

Fog lamps

Warning!

G

In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, only switch from position

U to B with the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from

U to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident.

1 Front fog lamps

2 Indicator lamp

3 Front fog lamps and rear fog lamp i

The fog lamps can be switched on with combination switch in position

õ or

U. Consult your state Motor Regulations regarding allowable lamp operation.

The switch is located on the upper center console.

Switching front fog lamps on and off

왘 Make sure the low beam headlamps are switched on.

왘 Press upper part 1 of switch.

The green indicator lamp ‡ in the instrument cluster comes on.

왘 Press upper part 1 of switch again.

The green indicator lamp

‡ in the instrument cluster goes out.

Switching front fog lamps and rear fog lamps on and off

왘 Make sure the low beam headlamps are switched on.

왘 Press lower part 3 of switch.


‡ in the instrument cluster comes on in addition to the yellow indicator lamp 2 in the switch.

왘 Press lower part 3 of switch again.


‡ in the instrument cluster and the yellow indicator lamp 2 in the switch go out.

Switching rear fog lamp on and off


The yellow indicator lamp 2 in the switch goes out.



‡ in the instrument cluster goes out.

111


Lighting

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher can be activated with the ignition switched on or off. It is activated automatically when an airbag is deployed.

The switch is located on top of the steering column.

Switching on hazard warning flasher

왘 Press the hazard warning flasher switch.

All the turn signals will flash.

Switching off hazard warning flasher

왘 Press hazard warning flasher switch again.

i

If the hazard warning flasher was activated automatically, press the hazard warning flasher switch twice to deactivate.

Interior lighting

The controls are located in the overhead control panel.

Hazard warning flasher switch

1 Left front interior lamp lens

2 Right front interior lamp lens

3 Automatic function off

4 Automatic function on

5 Rear interior lighting

112


Lighting

Automatic control

Activating automatic control

왘 Bring the rocker switch to center position 4.

Interior lamps (except cargo compartment lamp) are switched on in darkness, when you

앫 unlock the vehicle

앫

앫 open a door remove the key from the steering lock

In addition, the entry/exit lamps in the door trays will come on when you open a door.

When all doors are closed and no key is inserted in the steering lock, the interior lamps are switched off after a brief delay.

i

If the door remains open, the interior lamps (except cargo compartment lamp) switch off automatically after approximately 30 minutes.

Deactivating automatic control

왘 Press lower part 3 of rocker switch.

The interior lighting and the entry/exit lamps remain switched off in darkness, even when you

앫 unlock the vehicle

앫

앫 open a door remove the key from the steering lock

Manual control i

If a lamp is switched on manually, it will not go out automatically. This could cause the battery to become discharged.

Switching on front interior lamps

왘 Press on lamp lens 1 or 2.

The respective lamp switches on.

Switching off front interior lamps

왘 Press on lamp lens 1 or 2 again.

The respective lamp switches off.

Operating rear interior lighting with rocker switch

왘 Press on upper part 5 of rocker switch.

The rear interior lighting goes on.

컄컄

113


Lighting

컄컄 왘 Press on upper part 5 of rocker switch again.

The rear interior lighting goes off.

If the switch is pressed while the rear interior lighting is on, the function is reversed.

Reading lamps in inside rear view mirror

Operating rear interior lighting with lamp lens

Rear interior lighting

왘 Push on lamp lens (arrow) to switch rear interior lighting on or off.

1 Reading lamps

2 Reading lamps on/off

Switching reading lamp on and off

왘 Press button 2.

The lamp switches on.

왘 Press button 2 again.

The lamp switches off.

Cargo compartment lamp

1 Switched off

2 Switched on continuously

3 Automatic control

Switching off cargo compartment lamp

왘 Slide the switch to position 1.

The cargo compartment lamp is switched off, even when the liftgate is opened.

114

Switching on continuous cargo compartment lamp


The cargo compartment lamp is switched on continuously.

i

To prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged, make sure the switch is not in position 2 when leaving the vehicle.

Automatic control


The cargo compartment lamp is switched on and off by opening or closing the liftgate.


Lighting

115



왔


A full view illustration of the instrument cluster can be found in the “At a glance” section of this manual ( 컄 page 24).

The instrument cluster is activated when you:

앫 open the driver’s door

앫

앫 turn the key in steering lock to position 1 or 2 ( 컄 page 33) press the left knob 1

Instrument cluster illumination

앫

앫 i

You can set the instrument cluster illumination with the following lamps on:

앫 parking lamps low beam headlamps high beam headlamps

1 Left knob

2 Right knob

To brighten illumination

왘 Turn knob 1 clockwise.

The instrument cluster illumination will brighten.

To dim illumination

왘 Turn knob 1 counterclockwise.

The instrument cluster illumination will dim.

116



Coolant temperature gauge

앫

앫

Under normal driving conditions, the coolant temperature may rise to 248°F

(120°C). The coolant temperature may climb to the red marking:

앫 at high outside temperatures during stop-and-go city traffic when driving on hilly terrain

The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature in the red zone.

Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the

Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Warning!

G

Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.

Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

Display in the speedometer

Changing display

왘 Press the left knob 1 in the instrument cluster ( 컄 page 116).

The display changes between main odometer and trip odometer.

왘 Press the left knob 1 twice.

The next scheduled service is displayed

( 컄 page 232).

117



Resetting trip odometer Outside temperature indicator Setting the clock

왘 Press the left knob 1 ( 컄 page 116) repeatedly until you see the trip odometer display.

왘 Press and hold the left knob 1 until the trip odometer is reset.

Tachometer

To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated above its specified limit.

Warning!

G

The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.

Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

The outside temperature is displayed in the instrument cluster ( 컄 page 24).

When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your garage), you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed.

A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driving.

Hour

왘 Pull out the right knob 2 in the instrument cluster ( 컄 page 116) and turn it counterclockwise.

Minutes

왘 Pull out the right knob 2 in the instrument cluster ( 컄 page 116) and turn it clockwise.

i

To set the clock by a single hour or a few minutes, turn knob 2 just a few degrees in the direction indicated for hours or minutes.

118



왔


Information on driving with an automatic transmission is found in the “Getting started” section ( 컄 page 46).

Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions.

If the operating conditions change, the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its gear shift program.

i

During the brief warm-up, transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature.

The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:

앫 the gear selector lever position D with gear ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 ( 컄 page 121)

앫

앫 the position of the accelerator pedal

( 컄 page 123) the vehicle speed

The current gear selector lever position appears in the tachometer display

( 컄 page 24).

Warning!

G

It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

앫

앫

When the gear selector lever is in position D, you can influence transmission shifting by limiting the gear range changing gears manually

119



One-touch gearshifting

Even with an automatic transmission you can change the gears manually when the gear selector lever is in position D.

G i

To avoid overrevving the engine when the gear selector lever is moved to the D– direction, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s max. speed would be exceeded.

Downshifting

왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the D– direction.

The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission ( 컄 page 121).

Warning!

Upshifting

왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D+ direction.

The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmission.

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.

Canceling gear range limit

왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D+ direction until D reappears in the tachometer display.

The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D.

Shifting into optimal gear range

왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D– direction.

The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration. This will involve shifting down one or more gears.

120



Gear ranges

With the gear selector lever in position D, you can limit the transmission’s gear range by pressing the gear selector lever to the left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the gear selector lever to the right (D+).

The selected gear range appears in the tachometer display. If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected.

Effect

é

The transmission shifts through fourth gear only.

è

The transmission shifts through third gear only.

With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine.

Effect

ç

The transmission shifts through second gear only.

앫

앫

Allows the use of engine’s braking power when driving: on steep downgrades in mountainous regions

앫 under extreme operating conditions

æ

The transmission operates in first gear only.

For maximum use of engine’s braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades.

121



Gear selector lever position

Effect

ì

Park position

Gear selector lever position when the vehicle is parked. Place gear selector lever in position P only when vehicle is stopped.

The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to placing the gear selector lever in position P to secure the vehicle.

Effect


With the key removed, the gear selector lever is locked in position P.

If the vehicle’s electrical system is malfunctioning, the gear selector lever could remain locked in position P

( 컄 page 264).

í

Reverse gear

Place gear selector lever in position R only when vehicle is stopped.

Effect

ë

Neutral

No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be moved freely

(pushed or towed).

To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage N while driving.

If the ESP is deactivated or malfunctioning:

Move gear selector lever to N only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.

ê

Drive

The transmission shifts automatically. All five forward gears are available.

122



!

Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason with gear selector lever in N can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the


Warning!

G

Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

Warning!

G

Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects.

Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P ( 컄 page 53).

When parked on an incline, turn the front wheels towards the road curb.

Warning!

G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the steering lock, take it with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear selector lever from position P, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Accelerator position

Your driving style influences the transmission’s shifting behavior:

Less throttle Earlier upshifting

More throttle Later upshifting

Kickdown

Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration.

왘 Press the accelerator past the point of resistance.

The transmission shifts into a lower gear.

왘 Ease on the accelerator when you have reached the desired speed.

The transmission shifts up again.

123



Towing a trailer Emergency operation (Limp Home

Mode)

If you tow a trailer, note the following points:

앫 Manually shift to a lower gear range

(4, 3, 2, 1), if the transmission hunts between gears on inclines

( 컄 page 121).

앫

A lower gear range and reduction of speed reduces the change to overload or overheat the engine.

At very steep inclines switch transfer case to LOW RANGE mode

( 컄 page 125).

For more information on trailer towing, see the “Operation” section ( 컄 page 206).

If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in limp home (emergency operation) mode. In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be activated.


왘

왘

왘

Move gear selector lever to position P.

Turn off the engine.

Wait at least ten seconds before restarting.

Restart the engine.

왘

왘

왘

Move selector lever to position D

(for second gear) or R.

Have the transmission checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck


124



왔


In the following situations you should switch to LOW RANGE mode:

앫 during off-road driving

!

You should only operate the vehicle on a single axle dynamometer for briefly testing the brakes.

앫 when crossing water

앫 when towing up or down on steep gradients

The key must be in steering lock position 1 ( 컄 page 33).

왘 Press on the upper part of the switch.

During the changeover the indicator lamp ( 컄 page 25) flashes three times.

Once the changeover is complete, the indicator lamp comes on continuously.

Switching off LOW RANGE mode

Switching on LOW RANGE mode !

Only switch the LOW RANGE mode on or off, when the vehicle is

앫 at a complete standstill

왘

왘

Stop the vehicle.

Move the gear selector lever to position N.

앫 the engine speed is less than

1500 rpm

왘 Press on the upper part of the switch.

During the changeover the indicator lamp ( 컄 page 25) flashes three times.

Failure to do so may result in transmission or engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty.

Once the changeover is complete, the indicator lamp goes out.

LOW RANGE mode switch


For information on driving safety systems during LOW RANGE mode see the “Safety and Security” section ( 컄 page 76).

왘 Move the gear selector lever to position N.

125


Good visibility

왔

Good visibility

Information on the windshield wipers

( 컄 page 49) and for setting the rear view mirrors ( 컄 page 40) is found in the

“Getting started” section.

Rear view mirror

Interior rear view mirror, antiglare position

앫

앫

Automatic antiglare rear view mirror*

The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side and the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when:

앫 the automatic antiglare function is activated ( 컄 page 127) the ignition is switched on incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view mirror

The rear view mirror will not react if

앫

앫 reverse gear is engaged the interior light is turned on

1 Lever

왘 Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night position by moving lever 1 towards the windshield.

The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.

Warning!

G

The automatic antiglare function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the inside rear view mirror.

The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not react, for example, if the cargo area is fully loaded.

Glare can endanger you and others.

Warning!

G

In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks.

Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or the respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary.

126

Warning!

G

Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

Activating

!

Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water.

1 Button

2 Indicator lamp

왘 Press button 1.

Indicator lamp 2 comes on.

Deactivating

왘 Press button 1 again.

Indicator lamp 2 goes out.


Good visibility

Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position

The buttons are on the lower part of the center console.

1 Deactivating parking position

2 Activating parking position

3 Adjustment button

왘 Make sure you have stored a parking position for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror ( 컄 page 106).

왘 Switch on ignition (if not already on).

왘 Press button 2.

The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror is selected.

컄컄

127


Good visibility

컄컄 왘 Engage reverse gear R.

The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror moves automatically to the stored parking position.

The exterior rear view mirror returns to its stored driving position:

앫 ten seconds after you put the gear selector lever in position D

앫

앫 immediately once your vehicle exceeds a speed of approx. 6 mph (10 km/h) immediately when you press the button 1 for driver’s side mirror i

If the button 1 is pressed, the automatic passenger-side exterior rear view parking position is deactivated.

Electrically folding exterior rear view mirrors

!

Before driving the vehicle through an automatic car wash, fold the exterior mirrors in. Otherwise they may get damaged.

Folding exterior mirrors in and out manually*

The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if they are not completely folded out.

The buttons are located on the upper center console.

1 Folds the exterior mirrors in

2 Folds the exterior mirrors out

왘 Check that the ignition is switched on.

All the lamps in the instrument cluster come on.

i

With the front doors closed, the exterior mirrors can still be folded in and out approximately 30 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.

128


Good visibility

Folding in

왘 Briefly press button 1 (

The mirrors fold in.

컄 page 127).

!

Before you drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash, fold the exterior mirrors in, otherwise they may get damaged.

i

If you are driving at more than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), you will not able to fold the exterior mirrors in.

Folding out

왘 Briefly press button 2.

The mirrors fold out.

!

If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear), reposition it manually by applying firm pressure until it snaps back into place.

If an exterior rear view mirror is forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front) press button 1 to fold mirrors in, then press button 2 to fold mirrors out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this may damage the adjustment mechanism.

The mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror normally.

Windshield wipers

Information on the windshield wipers is found in the “Getting started” section

( 컄 page 49).

!

If leaves, snow, etc. block the windshield wipers, the wiper motor turns off.

앫

앫

For safety reasons, withdraw key from steering lock. Remove blockage.

Turn the windshield wipers on again.

If windshield wipers fail to function at all in switch position 1,

앫 set the wiper switch to the next highest wiper speed.

앫 have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized


129


Good visibility

Intermittent wiping i

Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is opened.

Windshield wipers without rain sensor*

At speeds of approximately 105 mph

(170 km/h) the wiper switches automatically to continuous wiping. Always obey local speed limits.

Windshield wipers with rain sensor*

A rain sensor automatically controls the windshield wipers depending on how wet the windshield is.

왘

왘

Switch on ignition.

Set the wiper switch to position 1

( 컄 page 49).

After the initial wipe, pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by the rain sensor which monitors the wetness of windshield.

i

When intermittent wiping is on and the key is turned from position 1 to position 2 in the steering lock

( 컄 page 33), and kept in that position for longer than two seconds, the wipe interval will be set to approximately five seconds.

!

Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on the windshield, and wipers may be damaged as a result.

The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe the windshield once every time the engine is started. Dust that accumulates on the windshield might scratch the glass and /or damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry windshield.

130


Good visibility

Headlamp cleaning system*

The button is located on the right side of the dashboard.

Information on filling up the washer reservoir can be found in the “Operation” section ( 컄 page 224).

Rear window wiper

The rear window wiper will also automatically engage if the windshield wiper is engaged and the gear selector lever is placed in reverse.

앫

앫

Rear window wiper with rain sensor*

Rear window wiper intervals are controlled automatically according to the amount of water on the windshield and the speed of the vehicle, if: rear window wiper is switched on front windshield wipers are switched to intermittent wiping

The interval for the rear window wiper remains constant when the windshield wiper interval is ten seconds or more.

Headlamp washer button

왘 Switch on ignition.

왘 Briefly press the upper part of button.

The headlamps will be cleaned with a high-pressure water jet.

131


Good visibility

Sun visor

The sun visors protect you from sun glare while driving.

Warning!

G

Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.

Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare can endanger you and others.

Illuminated vanity mirrors

1 Mirror cover

2 Mounting

왘 Swing sun visors down when you experience glare.

왘 To use mirror, lift cover 1 up.

i

If sunlight enters through a side window, disengage sun visor from mounting 2 and pivot to the side.

왘 Turn the key in steering lock to position 1 ( 컄 page 33).

왘 Lift cover up.

The lamp switches on.

132

Rear window defroster

The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power. To keep the battery drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear. The defroster is automatically deactivated after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on the outside temperature.

Activating

왘

왘

Switch ignition on.

Press button

F ( 컄 page 135).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

Deactivating

왘 Press button

F again.

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

Warning!

G

Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, endangering you and others.

!

If the rear window defroster switches off too soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing, this means that too many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery. The system responds automatically by deactivating the rear window defroster.

As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the rear window defroster automatically turns itself back on.


Good visibility

133



왔


134

Item

1 Thumbwheel for center air vent

2 Center air vent, adjustable

3 Defroster air vent windshield

4 Thumbwheels for side air vent

5 Side air vent, adjustable

6 Footwell air vent

7 Automatic climate control



Automatic climate control panel in the front

Item

1 Air volume control

2 Defrosting

3 Air recirculation

4 Temperature control

5 Automatic control (temperature, air distribution, air volume)

6 AC cooling on/off (AC

OFF

)

Residual heat /ventilation (REST)

7 Interior temperature sensor

8 Air distribution control

9 Rear window defroster a Rear passenger compartment ventilation on/off

135



The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can operate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature.

Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system.

Warning!

G

When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the footwell can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents.

Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell air vents. If necessary, change the air flow using the air distribution controls to direct the air away from the footwell air vents

( 컄 page 138).

Warning!

G

Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

i

Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior.

If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off.

Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris.

Do not touch the interior temperature sensor to maintain a precise temperature.

The set value is indicated by a lighted segment on the control wheels.

136



Automatic mode

Switching on

왘 Briefly press button

U

( 컄 page 135).

The indicator lamp comes on. The temperature, air volume and distribution are controlled automatically.

왘 Adjust the temperature with the temperature control 4 ( 컄 page 135).

Temperature control is switched off in the extreme position (blue or red dot).

Switching off

왘 Briefly press button

U

( 컄 page 135).

The indicator lamp goes out. The automatic mode is switched off.

Air volume control 1 is set to fan speed 2 and air distribution is set to

V.

Activating basic setting

왘 Press button

U at least three seconds.

All functions are switched to automatic mode and temperature is set to 72°F

(22°C).

Changing basic setting

왘

왘

Set temperature control 4

( 컄 page 135) to desired temperature.

Press button

U for ten seconds.

The selected temperature value is stored and set.

i

Adjust temperature settings in small increments.

Adjusting air volume and air distribution manually i

If you turn air volume control 1 or air distribution control 8 ( 컄 page 135), the automatic mode switches off. The indicator lamp in the button

U goes out. The temperature control will still be in automatic mode.

Adjusting air volume

왘 Turn air volume control 1 to one of five air volume settings.

i

When set to 0 the system is fully deactivated and no fresh air is supplied. This setting should only be selected for short periods of time.

137



Adjusting air distribution

왘 Turn air distribution control 8

( 컄 page 135) to one the following symbols:

Symbol h j

V k

Function

Directs air to the center and side air vents

Directs air to the windshield and side air vents

Directs air into the entire vehicle interior

Directs air to the footwells and side air vents

Defrosting Air recirculation mode i

These settings should only be selected for a short time.

When the defrost setting has been selected, only the rear window defroster can be switched on. No other settings are possible.

Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside. This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment.

Warning!

G

Activating

왘 Press button

P ( 컄 page 135).


When the outside temperature is below

41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation mode for short periods to prevent window fogging.

Windshield fogged on the outside

왘 Switch the windshield wipers on,

( 컄 page 50).

왘 Turn air distribution control 8 to h or k.

Deactivating

왘 Press button

P again.

or

왘 Press button

U ( 컄 page 135).

The indicator lamp on the button

P goes out.

138



Activating

왘 Press button

Ä ( 컄 page 135).


i

To achieve the fastest possible cooling of the interior, the automatic climate control automatically switches to air recirculation. The indicator lamp in the button

Ä is not illuminated when the system automatically switches to air recirculation.

i

The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically

앫 after 30 minutes if the automatic climate control is switched on

앫

앫 after five minutes if the air conditioning is switched off after five minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 45°F (7°C)

Air conditioning

Deactivating

It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.

왘 Press button

° ( 컄 page 135).


° comes on.

Deactivating

왘 Press button

Ä ( 컄 page 135).


The air conditioning is operational while the engine is running and cools the interior air to the temperature set by the operator.

i

Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction.

Activating

Moist air can fog up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.

왘 Press button

° again.


° goes out.

The air conditioning system uses the refrigerant R-134a. This refrigerant is free of

CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer.

139



!

If the

° button on the automatic climate control panel starts to flash, this indicates that the air conditioning system is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned itself off. The air conditioning cannot be turned on again.

Have the air conditioning system checked at the nearest authorized


Residual heat and ventilation

With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine.

i

How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set in the climate control. The blower will run at lower speed regardless of the air volume control setting.

Deactivating

왘 Press button

°.

The indicator lamp on button

° goes out.

앫

앫

앫 i

The residual heat is automatically turned off: when the ignition is switched on after about 30 minutes

앫 if the coolant temperature is too low if the battery voltage drops

Activating

왘

왘

Turn the key in the steering lock to position 0 or 1 ( 컄 page 33).

Press button

° ( 컄 page 135).

The indicator lamp on button

° comes on.

140



Rear passenger compartment ventilation and rear automatic climate control

Automatic mode

The automatic climate control panel for the rear is located on the rear center console.

Deactivating

For an improved cooling or heating output in the front passenger compartment, you can switch off the rear passenger compartment ventilation.

왘 Press button

§ ( 컄 page 135).


The operation of the rear automatic climate control and the fresh air supply to the rear compartment is shut off.

Activating

왘 Press button

§ again.


The rear automatic climate control switches to automatic mode and fresh air enters the rear compartment.

1 Air volume control

2 Air distribution control

3 Automatic control (air distribution, air volume)

왘 Press button

U.


The automatic climate control cools or heats the interior depending on the temperature selected on the front climate control unit.

Adjusting air volume and air distribution manually i

When the air volume or air distribution control is pressed, the automatic mode is switched off. The indicator lamp in button

U is turned off. Temperature setting remains in automatic mode.

Adjusting air volume

왘 Press upper part of button

R.

왘

The blower setting is increased each time the button is pressed.

Press lower part of button

R.

The blower setting is decreased each time the button is pressed.

컄컄

141



컄컄 !

When in manual mode, the rear blower setting cannot be increased beyond the setting for the front blower setting.

For example, if the driver or front passenger changes the blower setting to level 3, the rear blower will not go higher than level 3 as well.

Adjusting air distribution

왘 Press upper part of button

Ô.

왘

Air is directed upwards.

Press lower part of button

Ó.

Air is directed to the footwell.

Front and rear air vents i

For draft-free ventilation, adjust the air vents upwards.

To allow unrestricted operation of the automatic climate control, the air vents should remain open.

M

Adjusting side air vents

왘 Turn thumbwheel 4 ( 컄 page 135) to one of the following positions:

Symbol h l

Function

Open

Ventilation of side windows in area of exterior mirror

Closed

142

Center air vents Rear passenger compartment air vents

Opening

왘 Turn thumbwheel for center air vent 1

( 컄 page 135) upward to position h.

Closing

왘 Turn thumbwheel for center air vent 1 downward to position

M.

Use the left thumbwheel to adjust the center air vents on the left and in the center.

Use the right thumbwheel to adjust the right center air vent.

1 Left center air vent, adjustable

2 Right center air vent, adjustable i

The temperature at the air vents for the rear passenger compartment is the same as at the dashboard center air vents.



143


Power windows

왔

Power windows

Opening and closing the side windows

The side windows can be opened and closed electrically. The switches for all the side windows are on the driver’s door. The switches for the respective windows are on the passenger door and on the rear center console.

1 Left front window

2 Right front window

3 Right rear window

4 Left rear window

5 Rear window override switch

( 컄 page 73).

Additional switches for the rear windows are located on the rear center console.

144

6 Left rear window

7 Right rear window

Warning!

G

When closing the windows, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.

The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if switch was pressed past the resistance point and released, by pressing the respective switch.

If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pressed the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the window, the automatic reversal function will stop the window and open it slightly.

If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the window by pressing the switch and holding it there, the automatic reversal function will not operate.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the steering lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

왘 Turn key in the steering lock to position 1 or 2.


Power windows

Opening the windows

왘 Press switch 1 to 4 at the symbol k to the resistance point.

The corresponding window will move downwards until you release the switch.

Closing the windows

왘 Press switch 1 to 4 at the symbol j to the resistance point.

The corresponding window will move upwards until you release the switch.

Warning

G

If you pull and hold the switch up when closing the window, and upward movement of the window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not operate.

Fully opening the windows

(Express-open)

왘 Press switch 1 to 4 at the symbol k past the resistance point and release.

The corresponding window opens completely.

If the window still does not close when there is no obstruction, then hold the switch j down. The side window will then close without the obstruction sensor function.

Warning!

G

Fully closing the windows

(Express-close)

왘 Press switch 1 to 4 at symbol j past the resistance point and release.

The corresponding window closes completely.

!

If the upward movement of the window is blocked during the closing procedure, the window will stop and open slightly.

Remove the obstruction, press the switch j again past the resistance point and release.

Driver’s door only:

If within five seconds switch j is again pressed past the resistance point and released, the automatic reversal will not operate.

Stopping windows

왘 Press respective switch again.

145


Power windows

Synchronizing power windows

The power window must be resynchronized each time

앫 after the battery has been disconnected.

앫 if the power windows cannot be fully opened (Express-open) or closed (Express-close).

Synchronizing the power windows


왘 Press the power window switches at the symbol j until the side windows are closed.

Hold the switches for approximately one second.

The power window are synchronized.

Rear quarter windows*

The switches are on the upper part of the center console.

1 Left side

2 Right side

왘 Turn key in the steering lock to position 1 or 2.

Warning!

G

When closing the windows, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. The closing of the windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Opening the windows

왘 Press and hold the upper part of switches 1 or 2.

The corresponding window will move downwards until you release the switch.

146

Closing the windows

왘 Press and hold the lower part of switches 1 or 2.

The corresponding window will move upwards until you release the switch.


Power windows

147



왔


Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up roof

The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened and closed electrically. The switch for the sliding/pop-roof is on the overhead control panel.

With the roof closed or tilted open, a screen can be slid into the roof opening to guard against sun rays. When sliding the roof open, the screen will also retract.

1 Push up to raise roof at rear

2 Push back to slide roof open

3 Push down to lower roof at rear

4 Push forward to slide roof closed

Warning!

G

When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.

The closing procedure can be immediately reversed by moving the switch in direction 1 or 2.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from steering lock and lock your vehicle.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

!

To avoid damaging the seals, do not transport any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the sliding/pop-up roof.

Do not open the sliding/pop-up roof if there is snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in malfunctions.

The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened or closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur ( 컄 page 265).

148



왘 Turn the key in the steering lock to position 1 or 2 ( 컄 page 33).

Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up roof

왘 To open, close, raise or lower the sliding/pop-up roof, move the switch in the required direction 1 to 4.

Release the switch when the roof has reached the desired position.

Opening the sliding / pop-up roof automatically

왘

왘

Briefly press switch in direction 2.

The sliding/pop up roof will not open completely.

Press switch again to open the sliding/pop-up roof completely.

Raising the roof

왘 Press and hold the switch in direction 1.

The roof is raised at rear.

Stopping the roof

왘 Briefly press the switch in any direction.

The movement of the roof will stop.

Synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof

Lowering the roof

왘 Pull and hold the switch in direction 3.

The sliding/ pop-up roof is lowered and closed.

The power sliding /pop-up roof must be resynchronized each time after:

앫 the battery has been disconnected

앫

앫

앫 the sliding /pop-up roof has been closed manually the sliding /pop-up roof does not open smoothly a malfunction

왘

왘

왘

Synchronizing

왘 Remove the fuse from the fuse box

( 컄 page 287).

Replace the fuse in the fuse box.

Switch on ignition.

Press and hold the switch in direction 1 until the sliding/pop-up roof is fully raised at the rear.

Hold the switch for approximately one second.

The sliding/pop-up roof is synchronized.

149


Driving systems

왔

Driving systems

The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages:

앫 Cruise control, with which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed.

앫 Parktronic*, with which you can assist your parking maneuvers.

The driving systems BAS, ABS, ESP, EBB and 4-ETS, are described in the “Safety and Security” section ( 컄 page 76).

Cruise control

Cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle.

Use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extended periods of time. You can set or resume cruise control at any speed over 20 mph

(30 km/h).

The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever.

The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever found on the left-hand side of the steering column ( 컄 page 23).

Warning!

G

Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must remain responsible for the vehicle speed and for safe brake operation.

Only use cruise control if the road, traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed.

앫 The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed.

앫 The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control.

앫 Deactivate cruise control when driving in fog.

The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed.

150

i

On uphill or downhill grades, cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed. Once the grade eases, the set speed will be resumed.

1 Set current or higher speed

2 Set current or lower speed

3 Cancel cruise control

4 Resume at last set speed

Setting current speed

왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed.

왘 Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise control lever.

The current speed is set.

왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Cruise control is activated.

Canceling cruise control

There are several ways to cancel cruise control:

왘 or

Step on the brake pedal.

왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever to position 3.

Cruise control will be canceled. The last speed set will be stored for later use.


Driving systems

!

Moving gear selector lever to position N while driving also cancels cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to position N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).

i

The last stored speed is canceled when you turn off the engine.

151


Driving systems

Setting a higher speed

왘 Lift the cruise control lever to position 1 and hold it up until the desired speed is reached.

왘 Release the cruise control lever.

The new speed is set.

i

Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate the cruise control. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), cruise control will resume the last speed set.

Setting a lower speed

왘 Depress the cruise control lever to position 2 and hold it down until the desired speed is reached.

왘 Release the cruise control lever.

The new speed is set.

i

When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the engine’s braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.

Setting to last stored speed (“Resume” function)

Warning!

G

Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:

1 km/ h) increments

The speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to preset speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

Faster

왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 1.

Slower

왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 2.

왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever to position 4.

Cruise control will resume the last set speed.

왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Transmission in LOW RANGE mode i

The cruise control should not be used during off-road driving.

152


Driving systems

Parktronic system* (Parking assist)

Warning!

G

Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is not intended to nor does it replace the need for extreme care. The responsibility during parking and other critical maneuvers rests always with the driver.

Make sure that no persons or animals are located in the area in which your are maneuvering. They could otherwise be injured.

Special attention must be paid to objects with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes

(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or street curbs). Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the vehicle.

The operational function of the Parktronic system can be affected by dirty sensors, especially at times of snow and ice. For notes on cleaning the Parktronic system sensors

( 컄 page 237).

Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers or the air brakes of trucks) can cause the system to send erratic indications, and should be taken into consideration.

Parktronic system monitors your vehicle’s environment by means of six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper.

The Parktronic system assists the driver during parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly indicates the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle.

With the ignition on, the Parktronic system engages automatically at speeds up to approximately 10 mph (15 km/h) and deactivates during higher speeds.

1 Sensors located in front bumper

153


Driving systems

Monitoring reach of sensors

The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and snow or they will be unable to function properly. Clean the sensors regularly without scratching or damaging them.

Front sensors

Center

Corners approx. 39 in (100 cm) approx. 24 in (60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center

Corners approx. 47 in (120 cm) approx. 32 in (80 cm) i

During parking maneuvers, pay special attention to objects located above or below the height of the sensors (e.g. planters or trailer hitches). The Parktronic system will not detect such objects at close range and damage to your vehicle or the object may result.

Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g. truck air brakes or jackhammers) may impair the operation of the

Parktronic system.

Minimum distance

Center

Corners approx. 8 in (20 cm) approx. 6 in (15 cm)

When an obstacle is located in this area, all warning displays will light up and a warning tone will sound. If the vehicle moves closer than the minimum distance to an object, the distance may no longer be displayed.

154

Warning indicators

The warning indicators show the distance between the sensor and the obstacle. The warning indicators for the front area are located above the center air vents in the dashboard. The warning indicator for the rear area is located in the rear passenger compartment lamp.

The gear selector lever position determines which warning indicator is activated.

Selector lever position

D, R, N, P

R

Warning indicator

Front area activated

Rear area activated

As soon as the sensors detect an obstacle, one or more segments light up, depending on the distance. An intermittent acoustic warning will also sound as the seventh segment comes on and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of three seconds will sound for the eighth segment.

1 Segments, left side of vehicle

2 Segments, right side of vehicle

Each warning indicator has six yellow and two red segments.


Driving systems

!

If all red segments light up in the warning indicators, a dirty sensor or a ultrasonic signal could be the reason.

앫 Clean the sensors ( 컄 page 237).

After cleaning the sensors, switch the ignition on.

155


Driving systems

Switching Parktronic system on/off

You can switch Parktronic system off manually.

The switch is located on the lower part of the center console.

1 Parktronic off

2 Indicator lamp

3 Parktronic on

!

If the Parktronic system is malfunctioning, all red segments of the warning indicators light up and an additional warning sounds.

Contact your Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center as soon as possible.

Switching Parktronic off

왘 Press switch on the upper part 1.

Indicator lamp 2 comes on.

Switching Parktronic on

왘 Press switch on the upper part 3.

The indicator lamp 2 goes out.

i

If you switch the ignition on, the

Parktronic system will be automatically switched on.

The rear Parktronic sensors will not automatically disengage when towing a trailer. Therefore switch the Parktronic system off.

156


Loading

왔

Loading

Loading instructions

Warning!

G

Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible using cargo tie-down rings and fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the load.

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle.

To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, always use partition net when transporting cargo.

Never drive vehicle with the liftgate open.

Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.

The gross vehicle weight which is the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, passengers and luggage/cargo must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) for your vehicle. In addition, the load must be distributed in such a way so that the weight on each axle never exceeds the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. The GVWR and

GAWR for your vehicle are indicated on the certification label which can be found on the left door pillar.

The handling characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle depend greatly on the load distribution. It is therefore recommended to load the vehicle according to the illustrations shown, with the heaviest items being placed towards the front of the vehicle.

Please pay attention to and comply with the following instructions when loading the vehicle and transporting cargo:

앫 Always place items being carried against front or rear seat backrests, and fasten them as securely as possible.

앫 The heaviest portion of the cargo should always be kept as low as possible against front or rear seat backrests.

157


Loading

Cargo tie-down rings

The cargo area is provided with four tie-down rings. Additional two rings are located at the rear of front seats.

Carefully secure cargo by applying even load on all rings with rope of sufficient strength to hold down the cargo.

i

While the partition net* ( 컄 page 159) will help protect you from smaller objects, it cannot prevent the movement of large, heavier objects into the passenger area in an accident. Such items must be properly secured using the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo area floor.

For additional safety when transporting cargo while the rear seats are unoccupied, fasten the outer seat belts crosswise into the opposite side buckles.

i

The cargo area is the preferred place to carry objects. The enlarged cargo area should only be used for items which do not fit in the cargo area alone.

Cargo tie-down ring

158


Loading

Hooks

Four hooks located on the rear compartment trim panels, two on each side.

Hooks

Use the hooks to secure light weight items.

The maximum permissible weight per hook is 9 lbs (4 kg).

Partition net*

Warning!

G

Always lock backrest in its upright position when rear seat bench is occupied by passengers, or cargo is being carried behind the seat bench.

To help avoid personal injury from smaller objects flying in the occupant area during a collision or sudden maneuver, always use partition net when transporting cargo.

The partition net cannot prevent the movement of large, heavier objects into the passenger area in an accident. Such items must be properly secured using the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo area floor

( 컄 page 158).

Passenger use of seats behind installed partition net is restricted because of the footwell being taken up by the net.

Use of the partition net is a particularly important safety factor when the vehicle is loaded higher than the top of the seat backrests with smaller objects.

The partition net can be installed behind the backrests of the front or rear seats.

Engaging partition net

1 Holder

2 Mounting hook

159


Loading

왘 One after the other, press the two mounting hooks 2 inward against the spring pressure and turn them.

The mounting hooks are locked in this position and you can move the net into position more easily.

왘 Turn one of the mounting hooks 2 in the opposite direction.

The spring pressure will push it out.

왘

왘

Engage mounting hook 2 in holder 1.

Turn the other mounting hook and engage it in the opposite holder.

왘 Push both mounting hooks 2 forward into holder 1.

Tightening partition net i

Before tightening the partition net, remove the cargo floor plates

( 컄 page 162).

Installation behind the front seats

1 Tie-down hook

2 Ring

Installation behind the rear seats

1 Tie-down hook

2 Ring

3 Tensioner

왘 Insert tie-down hook 1 in rings 2.

왘 Pull on loose ends of tie-down straps until net is tight.

왘 After driving a short distance, check the tension on the net and retighten if necessary.

160


Loading

왘

왘

Removing partition net

왘 Lift tensioner 3 upward to a horizontal position to release tensioning of the strap.

왘

왘

Disengage tie-down hooks 1 from rings 2.

Remove mounting hooks 2

( 컄 page 159) from holder 1

( 컄 page 159).

Roll up and close the partition net.

Store partition net behind rear seat bench.

Cargo area cover blind*

1 Handle

2 Holder

Warning!

G

Passenger use of third row seats with cargo area cover blind installed is restricted.

Closing blind

왘 Pull blind on handle 1 across the cargo area.

왘 Guide blind into holders 2.

Opening blind

왘 Disengage blind and guide retraction by its handle.

Removing blind

3 Button

4 Mounting sleeve

왘 Roll the blind up.

왘 Push mounting sleeve 4 inward against spring pressure until it engages.

왘 Remove blind from mounts.

161


Loading

Installing blind

왘 Place left side of blind in left mount.

왘 Position right side of blind over right mount.

왘 Push button 3, releasing mounting sleeve to slide into mount.

Cargo floor plates

Removing cargo floor plates i

Before you can remove the cargo floor plates, it is possible that the third row seats* ( 컄 page 102) must be removed.

Storing cargo floor plates

왘 Lift cargo floor plate at rear edge

(arrow).

왘

Cargo floor plate unhinges automatically.

Remove cargo floor plate by pulling it rearwards.

1 Hook and loop strip

왘 Fold the left cargo floor plate together.

왘 Open the hook and loop strip at the bottom of backrest of the third row seats* and insert cargo floor plate.

왘 Close the hook and loop strip.

162


Loading

Installing cargo floor plates

1 Opening

2 Pins

3 Attachment opening

4 Latch

왘 Grip into opening 1 and guide pins 2 into attachment opening 3.

The center pin must snap into place in latch 4.

Roof rack*

Warning!

G

Take into consideration that when the roof rack is loaded, the handling characteristics are different from those when operating the vehicles without the roof rack loaded.

The maximum roof load when using roof rack systems is 220 lbs (100 kg).

!

Attach roof racks to the roof rails only.

Use only those roof racks approved by

Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.

Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions.

The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.

For further information, inquire at your


Roof rails

163


Useful features

왔

Useful features

Interior storage spaces

Warning!

G

To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the cargo compartment if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs.

Always use partition net when transporting cargo. Partition net cannot secure hard or heavy objects.

Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects.

Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident.

Glove box Storage compartment under front passenger seat*

The storage compartment is lockable with its separate key.

1 Glove box lid release

2 Glove box lid i

The opened glove box is illuminated with the key in steering lock position 1

( 컄 page 33).

Opening the glove box

왘 Grab in recess and pull lid release 1.

The glove box lid 2 opens downward.

Closing the glove box

왘 Push glove box lid up to close.

1 Lock cylinder

2 Handle

Locking and unlocking the storage compartment

왘 Turn the key clockwise.

The storage compartment is locked.

왘 Turn the key counterclockwise.

The storage compartment is unlocked.

164


Useful features

Opening the storage compartment

왘 Press the lock cylinder in and pull storage compartment out using handle 2.

Closing the storage compartment

왘 Push the storage compartment in until the lock engages.

Armrest storage spaces

A flat storage tray with a deeper storage compartment underneath is located below the armrest. Both can be opened separately.

1 Button to open storage tray

2 Button to open storage compartment

3 Open cover

4 Storage tray

5 Coin holder

Opening the storage tray

왘 Press button 1 and lift up armrest.

The armrest contains two coin holders.

Opening the storage compartment

왘 Press button 2 and lift up armrest.

165


Useful features

Opening the storage compartment in front of armrest

왘 Slide the cover 3 rearward.

The storage compartment below contains a cup holder ( 컄 page 167).

Cup holders

Warning!

G

When not in use, keep the cup holder closed. Place only containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during vehicle maneuvers.

Cup holder in instrument panel

A cup holder is located on both the right and left side of the instrument panel.

Opening the cup holder

왘 Briefly touch top of cover.

The cup holder opens automatically.

Closing the cup holder

왘 Fold the cup holder upwards and press on it until it engages.

166

Cup holder in front of armrest Cup holder in rear center console


Useful features

Armrest in rear seat bench


왘 Slide cover rearward ( 컄 page 166).

왘 Fold the cup holder forward.


왘 Fold the cup holder backward.

왘 Slide cover forward.


왘 Briefly touch the cover.

The cup holder opens automatically.


왘 Press the cup holder forward and press on it until it engages.

!

Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat bench.

왘 Pull the armrest down by its top.

167


Useful features

Ashtrays and cigarette lighter Ashtray and cigarette lighter in the front center console

Warning!

G

Never touch the heating element or sides of the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot.

Hold the knob only.

When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the steering lock. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

1 Ashtray

2 Cigarette lighter

3 Cover plate i

The cigarette lighter socket can be used to accommodate electrical accessories up to a maximum of 50 W.

If the engine is off, the battery may become discharged when used for long periods of time.

Opening the ashtray

왘 Briefly touch cover plate 3.

The ashtray opens automatically.

Removing ashtray insert

Warning!

G

Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Move gear selector lever to position N. With gear selector lever in position N, turn off the engine.

왘 Secure vehicle from movement by setting the parking brake. Move the gear selector lever to position N.

Now you have more room to take out the insert.

왘 Grip the insert on the sides and pull it out upwards.

Reinstalling ashtray insert

왘 Install ashtray insert.

왘 Close the ashtray.

168


Useful features

Cigarette lighter

왘 Switch on the ignition.

왘 Push in cigarette lighter 2

( 컄 page 168).

The cigarette lighter will pop out automatically when hot.

Ashtray and cigarette lighter in the rear center console

!

Close the ashtray in the rear center console before folding the rear seat bench.

1 Ashtray

2 Cigarette lighter

3 Cover plate

Opening the ashtray

왘 Briefly touch cover plate 3.

The ashtray opens automatically.

Removing ashtray insert

왘 Grip the insert on the sides and pull it out upwards.

Reinstalling ashtray insert

왘 Install ashtray insert.

왘 Close the ashtray.

Cigarette lighter

왘 Switch on the ignition.

왘 Push in cigarette lighter 2.

The cigarette lighter will pop out automatically when hot.

169


Useful features

Electrical outlet

Electrical outlet

One outlet is located in the front passenger footwell and another on the right-hand side of the luggage compartment.

왘 Flip up cover and insert electrical plug

(cigarette lighter type).

i

The outlets function even if the key is not in the ignition.

The electrical outlet can be used to accommodate electrical consumers

(e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum of 180 W.

If the engine is off, the battery may become discharged if used for long periods of time.

Telephone*

Warning!

G

Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle.

The external antenna must be approved by

Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for information on the installation of an approved external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.

170


Useful features

Warning!

G

Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s attention to the road must always be his /her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.

If you choose to use the telephone

1

while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.

Only operate the MCS (Modular Control System)

1

if road, weather and traffic conditions permit.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of approx. 44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.

1

Observe all legal requirements

You can take and place telephone calls using the MCS unit.

See separate instruction manual for information on how to operate the telephone.

Warning!

G

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Whether or not prohibited by law, for safety reasons, the driver should not use the cellular telephone while the vehicle is in motion.

Stop the vehicle in a safe location before answering or placing a call.

Tele Aid*

!

The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the

SOS button. Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated. If the system is not activated, the indicator lamp in the

SOS button stays on after turning key in steering lock to position 2

( 컄 page 33) and the message TELE

AID – NOT ACTIVATED will be shown in the MCS display for approximately

10 seconds.

If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or

1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).

171


Useful features

The Tele Aid system

(Telematic Alarm Identification on

Demand)

앫

앫

The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response:

앫 automatic and manual emergency roadside assistance and information.

The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.

The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted using the volume control on the MCS unit.

왘 To activate, press the SOS button, the

Roadside Assistance button

• or the Information button

¡, depending on the type of response required.

i

The SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button

• and the Information button

¡ are located in the overhead control panel.

Shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID and password via first call mail. By visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”

(USA only), you will have access to account information, remote door unlock, profile and more.

!

The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the

GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of these signals are unavailable, the Tele

Aid system may not function and if this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means.

System self-check

Initially, after turning the key in the steering lock to position 2, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button

• and the Information button

¡ stay on longer than

10 seconds or do not come on). The message TELE AID - VISIT WORKSHOP appears for approx. 10 seconds in the MCS display.

172


Useful features

Warning!

G

The Tele Aid control unit is located under the front passenger seat. If there is accumulation of water or other liquid in this area, the Tele Aid control unit could suffer an electrical short circuit making the system inoperative. In this case the indicator lamp in the SOS button will not illuminate during or will remain illuminated after the system self-check. Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in the Roadside Assistance button and/or in the Information button do not come on during the system self-check or if any of these indicators remain illuminated constantly in red and/or the message TELE AID -

VISIT WORKSHOP is displayed in the MCS display after the system self-check, a malfunction in the system has been detected.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

Emergency calls

An emergency call is initiated automatically:

앫 following an accident in which the emergency tensioning detractors

(ETDs) or airbags deploy,

앫 if the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away alarm stays on for more than

20 seconds. See anti-theft alarm system ( 컄 page 83) and tow-away alarm

( 컄 page 84).

An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the inside rear view mirror labeled SOS, then briefly pressing the button located under the cover. See below for instructions on initiating an emergency call manually.

173


Useful features

Once the emergency call is in progress, the indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to flash. The message EMERGENCY CALL –

CONNECTING CALL appears in the MCS display. When the connection is established, the message EMERGENCY CALL –

CALL CONNECTED appears in the MCS display. All information relevant to the emergency, such as the location of the vehicle

(determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification number and color are generated.

A voice connection between the Response

Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated.

When a voice connection is established the audio system mutes and the message

TELE AID – EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE appears in the MCS display. The Response

Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the accident provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle.

The Tele Aid system is available if:

앫 it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services, connection and cellular air time

앫 the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the response center.

i

Location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the response center.

Warning!

G

If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).

The message EMERGENCY CALL –

CALL FAILED appears in the MCS display for approx. ten seconds.

Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.

174

Initiating an emergency call manually

1 Cover

2 SOS button

왘 Briefly press on cover 1.

The cover will open.

왘 Press SOS button 2 briefly.

The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 will flash until the emergency call is concluded.

왘 Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center.

왘 Close cover 1 after the emergency call is concluded.


Useful features

Warning!

G

If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occupants.

Roadside Assistance button

•

1 Cover

2 Roadside Assistance button •



왘 Press and hold the button 2 (for longer than two seconds).

A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.

The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message ROADSIDE

ASSISTANCE – CONNECTING CALL will appear in the MCS display.

175


Useful features

When the connection is established, the message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE –

CALL CONNECTED appears in the MCS display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).

i

While the call is connected you can change to navigation menu by pressing

NAVI button on the MCS unit.

A voice connection between the Roadside

Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established. When a voice connection is established the audio system mutes and the message TELE AID

– ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE appears in the MCS display.

왘 Describe the nature of the need for assistance.

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified

Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. For services such as labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside

Assistance manual for more information.

These programs are only available in the

USA:

앫 Sign and Drive services: Services such as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable,

앫 Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This function permits the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher to download malfunction codes and actual vehicle data.

i

The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button

• remains illuminated in red for approx. ten seconds during the system self-check after turning the key in the steering lock to position 2 (together with the SOS button and the Information button

¡).

See system self-check ( 컄 page 172) when the indicator lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds.

176


Useful features

If the indicator lamp in the Roadside

Assistance button

• is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network was not available). The message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE –

CALL FAILED appears in the MCS display.

Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the END Button on the

MCS unit.

Information button

¡

1 Cover

2 Information button ¡



왘 Press and hold the button (for longer than two seconds).

A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated. The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message INFO – CONNECTING CALL will appear in the MCS display.

When the connection is established, the message INFO – CALL CONNECTED appears in the MCS display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).

i

While the call is connected, you can change to navigation menu by pressing

NAVI button on the MCS unit.

A voice connection between the Customer

Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be established. When a voice connection is established the audio system mutes and the message TELE AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE appears in the MCS display. Information regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is available to you.

177


Useful features

For more details concerning the Tele Aid system, please visit www.mbusa.com and use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only).

i

The indicator lamp in the Information button

¡ remains illuminated in red for approx. 10 seconds during the system self-check after turning key in the steering lock to position 2 (together with the SOS button and the Roadside

Assistance button

•).

See system self-check ( 컄 page 172) when the indicator lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds.

If the indicator lamp in the Information button

¡ is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).

178

The message INFO CALL FAILED appears in the MCS display.

Information calls can be terminated using the END button on the MCS.

!

If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or remains illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a fault or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit your Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at

1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or

1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possible.

앫

앫

앫

앫

Upgrade signals

The Tele Aid system processes calls using the following priority.

Automatic emergency – First priority

Manual emergency – Second priority

Roadside assistance – Third priority

Information – Fourth priority

Should a higher priority call be initiated while you are connected, an upgrade (alternating) tone will be heard and the appropriate indicator lamp will flash. If certain information such as vehicle identification number or customer information is not available, the operator may need to retransmit.

During this time you will hear a beep and voice contact will be interrupted. Voice contact will resume once the retransmission is completed. Once a call is concluded, a beep will be heard and the respective indicator lamp will stop flashing. The MCS system operation will resume.

!

If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset, contact the Response Center at

1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or

1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes

(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in

Canada.

i

The indicator lamp on the corresponding button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative, except

Roadside Assistance and Information calls, which can also be terminated by using the END button on the MCS unit.


Useful features i

When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the MCS system audio is muted and the selected mode (radio, tape or CD) pauses. The optional cellular phone (if installed) switches off. If you must use this phone, the vehicle must be parked.

Disconnect the coiled cord and place the call. The navigation system (if engaged) will continue to run. A pop-up window will appear in the MCS display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress.

Remote door unlock

In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. key inside vehicle), and no other key is available:

왘 Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response

Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).

You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement.

왘 Then return to your vehicle and pull outside handle of the liftgate for minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing.

The message EMERGENCY CALL –

CALL CONNECTED appears in the MCS display.

As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call.

179


Useful features

The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature.

i

The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available.

The SOS button will flash and the message EMERGENCY CALL –

CALL CONNECTED will appear in the MCS display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command.

Once the vehicle is unlocked, a

Response Center specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants.

If the outside liftgate handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center, you must wait

15 minutes before pressing the outside liftgate handle again.

Stolen vehicle tracking services

In the event your vehicle was stolen:

왘 Report the incident to the police

The police will issue a numbered incident report.

왘 Pass this number on to the

Mercedes-Benz Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service.

The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele

Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location will only be provided to law enforcement.

Garage door opener

The built-in remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled devices, for example garage door openers, gate openers, or other devices compatible with HomeLink

®

or some other systems.

You can program the signal transmitter buttons.

180

Remote control integrated into the overhead control panel

1 Hand-held remote control transmitter (not part of the vehicle equipment)

2 Hand-held transmitter button

3,4,5 Signal transmitter button

6 Indicator lamp

Warning!

G

Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage.

When programming a garage door opener, the door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or closes.

Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by

U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse - does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards.


Useful features i

Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible with the integrated opener. If you should experience difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact your authorized

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, or call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA only) at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer

Service (in Canada) at

1-800-387-0100.

181


Useful features i

For operation in the USA only:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control

Step 1:


Step 2:

왘 If you have previously programmed an integrated signal transmitter button and wish to retain its programming, proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 3 and 5 and release them only when the indicator light begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds (do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory. If you later wish to program a second and /or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3.

Step 3:

왘 Hold the end of the hand-held remote control transmitter 1 of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to

5 in (5 to12 cm) away from the surface of the integrated remote control located on the interior rear view mirror, keeping the indicator lamp 6 in view.

Step 4:

왘 Using both hands, simultaneously press the hand-held transmitter button 2 and the desired integrated signal transmitter button (3, 4 or 5). Do not release the buttons until completing step 5.

The indicator lamp 6 on the integrated remote control will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.

182


Useful features i

The indicator lamp 6 flashes the first time the signal transmitter button is programmed. If this button has already been programmed, the indicator lamp will only start flashing after 20 seconds.

Step 5:

왘 When the indicator lamp 6 flashes rapidly, release both buttons.

Step 6:

왘 Press and hold the just-trained integrated signal transmitter button and observe the indicator lamp 6.

If the indicator lamp 6 stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the integrated signal transmitter button is pressed and released.

i

If the indicator lamp 6 flashes rapidly for about two seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with the “rolling code” feature.

Step 7:

왘 To program the remaining two buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3.

Rolling code programming

To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing the “Programming” portion

(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier.)

Step 8:

왘 Locate “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit.

Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand.

Depending on manufacturer, the “training” button may also be referred to as

“learn”or “smart” button. If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button, refer to the garage door opener operator’s manual. 컄컄

183


Useful features

컄컄 Step 9:

왘 Press “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit.

The “training light” is activated.

You have 30 seconds to initiate the following step.

Step 10:

왘 Firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the programmed integrated signal transmitter button (3, 4 or 5).

Step 11:

왘 Press, hold for two seconds and release same button a second time to complete the training process.

Some garage door openers (or other rolling code equipped devices) may require you to perform this procedure a third time to complete the training.

Step 12:

왘 Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed integrated signal transmitter button (3, 4 or 5).

Step 13:

왘 To program the remaining two buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3.

Gate operator/Canadian programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this

Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator (regardless of where you live) by using the programming procedures, replace step 4 with the following:

184


Useful features

Step 4:

왘 Continue to press and hold the integrated signal transmitter button (3,

4 or 5) while you press and re-press

(“cycle”) your hand-held remote control transmitter 1 every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. Upon successful training, the indicator lamp 6 will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds.

왘 Proceed with programming step 5 and step 6 to complete.

Erasing the remote control memory


왘 Simultaneously hold down the signal transmitter buttons 3 and 5, for approximately 20 seconds, or until the indicator lamp 6 flashes rapidly. Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds.

The codes of all three channels are erased.

i

If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all three channels.

Operation of remote control


왘 Select and press the appropriate integrated signal transmitter button (3,

4 or 5 to activate the remote controlled device.

The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed – up to

20 seconds.

Reprogramming a single integrated signal transmitter button

To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow these steps:

왘 Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button (3, 4 or 5). Do not release the button.

왘 The indicator lamp will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the integrated signal transmitter button, proceed with programming starting with step 3.

185


Useful features

Trip computer*

The trip computer is located in the overhead console.

1 RESET

2 MODE

3 Display

Switching on the trip computer


왘

Display 3 shows one of the available functions.

If a function display does not appear, press MODE 2.

i

With engine not running, the display switches off automatically 30 seconds after the last entry.

Selecting functions

왘 Press MODE 2 repeatedly until the desired display appears.

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

The functions are displayed in the following order:

앫 Date

Compass

Stop watch

Present fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption

Distance remaining

Country

Switching off trip computer

Setting the date

왘 Press MODE 2 repeatedly until the date appears.

왘 Press RESET 1.

The month shown flashes.

왘 Press MODE 2 to advance to selected month.

왘 Press RESET 1.

The day shown flashes.

왘 Press MODE 2 to advance to selected day.

왘 Press RESET 1.

The year shown flashes.

왘 Press MODE 2 to advance to selected year.

왘 Press RESET 1.

The display stops flashing and the date is set.

186


Useful features

Compass

The compass displays the direction the vehicle is traveling. The display 3 will show you N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW.

i

The presence of buildings, bridges, power lines and large antenna masts can influence the displayed values. Metallic or magnetic objects in or on the vehicle can influence the accuracy of the compass.

To ensure the display is correct, the compass must be set to the proper geographic zone ( 컄 page 188). It may also be necessary to calibrate the compass

( 컄 page 188).

Zone map North America Zone map South America

187


Useful features

왘

왘

Setting the compass zone

왘 Determine the geographical point of the vehicle with the aid of the zone maps.

왘

Switch on the ignition.

Press MODE 2 ( 컄 page 186) repeatedly until the compass display appears in the trip computer display 3.

Press RESET 1 ( 컄 page 186) to select the compass zone mode.

The zone selected last is shown in the display.

왘 Press RESET 1 repeatedly until the correct compass zone, as determined from the zone map, is shown in the display.

왘 Press MODE 2 twice.

The new compass zone is activated and the compass display will be shown.

Calibrating the compass

If the vehicle was exposed to a significant magnetic zone, such as high voltage power lines, the compass may have to be calibrated.

To calibrate the compass correctly, observe the following:

앫 Calibrate the compass in an area free of steel superstructures and power lines.

앫

앫

Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. exterior lamps, climate control, rear window defroster etc.).

Do not open or close the sliding/pop-up roof.

앫 Close doors and liftgate.

i

An open liftgate triggers the display - - .

왘

왘

왘

Start and run the engine.

Press MODE 2 ( 컄 page 186) repeatedly until the compass display appears in the trip computer display 3.

Press RESET 1 and afterwards press

MODE 2.

In the display appears CAL– .

왘 Press and hold RESET 1 for approximately two seconds.

The calibration mode is activated and the display shows CAL .

왘 Drive without interruption two full circles at a speed between 3 mph

(5 km/h) and 7 mph (10 km/h).

The message CAL goes out after a short time. The calibration is now complete.

188


Useful features i

If CAL remains in the display, calibration was not successfully completed. You have to recalibrate:

앫 Remove the key from the steering lock.

앫 Start the vehicle and start the calibration procedure described previously.

We recommend that you have the compass calibrated at a Mercedes-Benz

Light Truck Center.

Stopping

왘 Press RESET 1 again to stop counting.

Resetting

왘 Press and hold RESET 1 until the display shows “0:00”.

Average fuel consumption

왘 Press MODE 2 ( 컄 page 186) repeatedly until the average fuel consumption display appears in the trip computer display 3.

Stop watch

왘 Press MODE 2 ( 컄 page 186) repeatedly until the stop watch display appears in the trip computer display 3.

Distance remaining with fuel presently in tank

왘 Press MODE 2 ( 컄 page 186) repeatedly until the distance remaining display appears in the trip computer display 3.

i

When the fuel supply drops to reserve level the display flashes distance remaining.

앫 USA only:

The display alternates between

FUEL and distance remaining until supply is consistently below the reserve level. When the fuel supply is very low [approximately 1.5 gal

(5.5 l)] FUEL is displayed continuously.

Counting

왘 Press RESET 1 ( counting.

컄 page 186) to start

189


Useful features

Display

GEr

GB

ESP

Fr

USA

CAN-ENG

CAN-Fr

GEr

Country

왘

왘

Press MODE 2 ( 컄 page 186) repeatedly until the country display appears in the trip computer display 3.

Press and hold RESET 1 a minimum of five seconds to change the country unit system.

왘

왘

Setting CAN-English

왘 Press RESET 1 repeatedly until CAN is displayed.

Press MODE 2 to select –ENG .

Press MODE 2 again to set CAN-English.

Canada units system selection

You can choose between CAN-English or

CAN-French.

Setting CAN-French

왘 Press RESET 1 repeatedly until CAN is displayed.

왘 Press MODE 2.

–ENG is displayed.

왘 Press RESET 1 to select –Fr .

왘 Press MODE 2 to set CAN-French.

The language selected determines how the various displays are presented, see table.

Language

German

English

Spain

French

American

American

French

German

Date

DD.MM

MM.DD

DD.MM

DD.MM

MM.DD

MM.DD

DD.MM

DD.MM

Cardinal points

Süd, Nord, Ost, West

Fuel consumption l/100 km

South, North, East, West mi/gal (Imperial)

Sur, Norte, Este, Oeste l/100 km

Sud, Nord, Est, Ouest l/100 km

South, North, East, West mi/gal (US)

South, North, East, West l/100 km

Sud, Nord, Est, Ouest l/100 km

Süd, Nord, Ost, West l/100 km

Distance remaining

Kilometer

Miles

Kilometer

Kilometer

Miles

Kilometer

Kilometer

Kilometer

190

Operation

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

Driving instructions

At the gas station

Engine compartment

Tires and wheels

Winter driving

Maintenance

Vehicle care

191

Operation


In the “Operation” section you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.

앫

앫

왔


The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later on.

앫 Drive your vehicle during the first

1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds.

앫 During this period, avoid heavy loads

(full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than

2

/

3

of maximum rpm in each gear).

Avoid accelerating by kick-down.

앫

Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever.

Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when driving at moderate speeds (for hill driving).

After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds to the permissible maximum.

All of the above instructions, as may apply to your vehicle type, also apply when the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after the engine, the transfer case, the front differential or the rear differential has been replaced.

i

Always obey applicable speed limits.

192

Operation


왔


Drive sensibly – save fuel

Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions.

앫

앫

To save fuel you should:

앫 Keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures

Remove unnecessary loads

Allow engine to warm up under low load use

앫 Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration

앫 Have all maintenance work performed at the intervals specified in the Service

Booklet and as required by the FSS.

Contact your authorized

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center

Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on short trips and in hilly country.

Drinking and driving

Warning!

G

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are a very dangerous combination. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgement.

The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive.

Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.

Pedals

Warning!

G

Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement.

Power assistance

Warning!

G

With the engine is not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.

193

Operation


Brakes

Warning!

G

After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components, the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front.

Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads.

It can also result in the brakes overheating, thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.

!

Be very careful not to endanger other road users when you apply the brakes.

Refer to the description of the Brake

Assist System (BAS) ( 컄 page 78).

To help prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces (particularly salted roads), it is advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking. The heat generated serves to dry the brakes.

If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above-normal braking pressure at higher speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads.

If the parking brake is released and the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on and there is no audible warning (EBP), the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low.

Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.

Have the brake system inspected immediately. Contact your authorized


All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by qualified technicians only. Contact your authorized


194

Operation


Install only brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

Warning!

G

If other than recommended brake pads are installed, or other than recommended brake fluid is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired. This could result in an accident.

!

When driving down long and steep grades, relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear.

After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some time, rather than immediately parking, so the air stream will cool down the brakes faster.

Driving off

Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off. Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic.

Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.

When starting off on a slippery surface, do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off.

Doing so may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the


195

Operation


Parking

!

Set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition, move gear selector lever to position P.

When parking on hills, always turn front wheels towards the curb.

Warning!

G

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

To reduce the risk of personal injury, or damage to the vehicle powertrain, as a result of vehicle/ trailer movement, always:

Keep right foot on brake pedal.

Shift gear selector lever to position N.

앫

Have a second person place wheel chocks on downhill side of left and right trailer wheels.

Slowly release brake pedal and let vehicle and trailer roll into chocks until stopped.

Firmly depress parking brake pedal.

Move gear selector lever to position P.

When parked on an incline, turn front wheel towards the road curb.

Tires

Warning!

G

If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road.

Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire dealer for repairs.

Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately

1

/

16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced.

196

Operation


The tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.

Warning!

G

Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the tread wear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately

1

/

16 in

(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches

1

/

8 in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.

Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely.

Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures).

Warning!

G

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

Hydroplaning

Depending on the depth of the water on the road, hydroplaning may occur even at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain.

Tire traction

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road.

You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point.

Warning!

G

If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be substantially reduced. Under such weather conditions, drive, steer and brake with extreme caution.

Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately

1

/

6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the winter season to ensure normal balanced handling characteristics.

On packed snow, they can reduce your stopping distance as compared with summer tires.

Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not covered with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution.

197

Operation


!

Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the


Tire speed rating

Regardless of the tire speed rating, local speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions.

Warning!

G

Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.

Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious injury and possible death, for you and for others.

ML 350

Your vehicle is factory equipped with

“H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating of 130 mph (210 km/h).

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of

130 mph (210 km/h).

ML 500

Your vehicle is factory equipped with

“V”-rated tires, which have a speed rating of 149 mph (240 km/h).

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of

130 mph (210 km/h).

i

For information on speed ratings for winter tires, see “Winter tires”

( 컄 page 230).

Winter driving instructions

The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration, braking and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions.

When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, move gear selector lever to position N. Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action.

i

For information on driving with snow chains, see “Snow chains”

( 컄 page 231).

198

Operation


Warning!

G

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss.

Do not engage the transfer case in position

LOW when driving on ice or packed snow. At speeds below 18 mph (30 km / h) vehicle steering is adversely affected by the LOW

RANGE - ABS ( 컄 page 77).

Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal brake effect.

Depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency back to normal.

If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed.

Warning!

G

Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.

Warning!

G

The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice.

For more information, see "Winter driving"

( 컄 page 230).

Warning!

G

If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.

To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind.

199

Operation


Standing water

!

Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth. Before driving through water, determine its depth.

Never accelerate before driving into water. The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them.

If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment. Water in these areas could cause damage to electrical components or wiring of the engine or transmission, or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake, causing severe internal engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the


Off-road driving

Warning!

G

Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This will make it easier to recognize unexpected obstacles and avoid damage to the vehicle.

To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never turn it around on steep inclines. If the vehicle cannot complete the attempted climb, back it down in reverse gear.

Do not drive along the side of a slope (danger of vehicle rollover). The vehicle might otherwise rollover. If in doing so the vehicle begins to show a tendency to roll, immediately steer into a line of gravity (straight up or downhill).

Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle.

You may lose control of the vehicle if you use only the service brake.

Warning!

G

Sand, dirt, mud and other material having friction property can cause exceptional wear and tear as well as brake failure.

Have the brakes checked for dirt build-up and cleaned. There is otherwise a risk that full braking power may not be available in an emergency.

Read this chapter carefully before you begin off-road travel.

Familiarize yourself with the vehicle characteristics and gear changing before you attempt any difficult terrain off-road driving. We recommend that you start out with easy off-road travel.

200

앫

앫

앫

앫

Special driving features for off-road driving

The following driving features are available for specific kind of operation:

LOW RANGE mode (

LOW RANGE – ABS (

LOW RANGE – ESP (

컄

컄

LOW RANGE – 4-ETS (

컄 page 125) page 77)

컄 page 80) page 81)

Off-road driving rules

Engage the LOW RANGE mode before driving under off-road conditions

( 컄 page 125).

Fasten items being carried as securely as possible ( 컄 page 157).

i

We recommend keeping doors, liftgate, windows, and sliding/pop-up roof* closed whenever driving in off-road mode.

Operation


!

Observe the following during off-road driving:

앫 Adjust vehicle speed to condition of terrain. The more uneven, rutty and steeper the terrain, the lower the speed should be

앫

앫

Watch out for obstacles, such as rocks, holes, tree stumps and ruts.

Be especially careful when driving in unknown territory. It may be necessary to get out of the vehicle and scout the path you intend to take.

앫

앫

Before driving through water, determine is depth.

Do not stop vehicle while immersed in water, and do not shut off the engine.

앫

앫

앫

In sandy soil, please drive at a steady speed as allowed by conditions. This helps overcome the vehicle rolling resistance and reduces the likelihood of the vehicle sinking into the ground.

Do not initiate jumps with the vehicle. It interrupts the forward momentum of the vehicle.

Always drive onto slopes with the the engine running and the vehicle in gear.

Checklist before off-road driving

Tires

앫 Check the tread depth and maintain specified tire pressure (see tire pressure label inside the fuel filler flap).

앫

앫

Check tires for possible damage and remove foreign objects.

Replace missing valve caps.

201

Operation


Rims

앫 Dented or bent rims can cause tire pressure loss and damage the tire beads. For this reason, check and, if necessary, change rims before driving off-road.

Vehicle tool kit

앫

앫

Check if the vehicle jack is functional.

In all cases take the vehicle tool kit, a strong tow rope, a shovel and a small plank (to put under the vehicle jack on sandy soil) with you.

Driving in steep terrain

Slope angle

1 25°

2 26°

앫 Switch to LOW RANGE mode before starting to drive up or down steep inclines ( 컄 page 125).

앫 Driving on embankments, slopes and other steep inclines should only be done straight up or downhill, i.e. in the line of gravity. Maximum vehicle climbing ability is a 60% grade.

앫

앫

Do not drive along the side of a slope

(danger of vehicle rollover). If in doing so, the vehicle begins to show a tendency to roll, immediately steer into a line of gravity (straight up or downhill).

To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never turn it around on steep inclines.

If the vehicle cannot complete the attempted climb, back it down in reverse gear.

앫

앫

Utilize the engine’s braking power when descending a slope, observe the engine speed (do not overview the engine). Apply the service brake as needed.

Check the brakes after a lengthy downgrade drive.

i

Avoid excessive engine speeds – drive with moderate engine speeds

(max. 3000 RPM).

Select gear range 2 or 1 on the automatic transmission ( 컄 page 121).

Traction in steep terrain

앫 Be easy on the accelerator and watch for continuous wheel traction when driving in steep terrain.

The 4-ETS helps greatly when starting out on a steep incline when the front wheels have then the tendency to slip due to the weight shifting away the front axle.

202

Operation


The 4-ETS recognizes the situation and limits the torque for the front wheels by braking them. Simultaneously the torque for the rear wheels is increased.

Driving across a hilltop

앫 Decelerate just ahead of a hilltop (do not select gear range N), to prevent the vehicle from speeding up too much after climbing a hill.

Use the momentum of the vehicle to drive across the hilltop.

Driving in this manner prevents the vehicle from jumping across the hilltop and thus loosing its forward momentum.

Driving downhill

앫 Select gear range 1 on the automatic transmission ( 컄 page 121).

앫

앫

Drive downhill observing the same rules as driving uphill ( 컄 page 202).

The special LOW RANGE – ABS setting allows for precise and brief (cyclical) blocking of the front wheels, permitting them to dig into loose ground.

Remember that the front wheels when stopped, slide across a surface, thus loose their ability to steer the vehicle.

Driving through water

1 20 in (50 cm)

앫 Before driving through water, determine its depth.

앫

It should not be deeper than approximately 20 inches (50 cm).

Make sure you check the water bed.

The ground surface may not be firm which may result in deeper waters than expected when driving the vehicle through it.

Switch to LOW RANGE mode before driving through water ( 컄 page 125).

203

Operation


앫

앫

앫

Switch off the exterior lamps as well as the climate control.

Select gear range 1 on the automatic transmission ( 컄 page 121).

Enter the water only at a shallow spot, driving at walking speed.

!

Never accelerate before driving into the water. The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them.

앫 To dry the brakes, apply pressure to the brake pedal several times after leaving the water.

Crossing obstacles

앫

앫

Do not stop vehicle while immersed in water, and do not shut off the engine.

There is a very high level of driving resistance in water. The surface is slippery and may not be firm, making pulling away in water difficult and dangerous.

Clean mud off the tire tread after driving through water.

!

Obstacles can damage the vehicle undercarriage or suspension components. If possible use the assistance of a second person outside the vehicle to scout the path you intend to take and check for adequate ground clearance when you cross obstacles with your vehicle. The person assisting you outside the vehicle should always be a safe distance away from the vehicle and positioned so that he or she cannot get hurt in case of any unexpected vehicle movement.

After off-road driving or crossing obstacles, inspect vehicle for any damage, especially vehicle undercarriage and suspension components. Failure to do so can adversely affect the vehicle's future performance, including increased chance of an accident.

204

Operation


앫

앫

앫

Check the vehicle clearance before crossing obstacles.


Cross obstacles (e.g. tree stumps or big rocks) very slowly by aiming one of the front wheels at the center of the obstacle, and repeat same with the rear wheel.

!

Special attention is needed when you cross obstacles on a steep incline.

The vehicle could slide sideways as a result of its possible slanted position which in turn may result in the vehicle tipping or rolling over.

Ruts

A number of off-road tracks or other byways have deep ruts which can cause the undercarriage to come in contact with the ground.

앫

앫


Drive next to the ruts rather than through them if at all possible.

Returning from off-road driving

Warning!

G

If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the roadway.

Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire dealer for repairs.

205

Operation


Off-road driving increases strain on the vehicle.

We recommend that you inspect the vehicle for possible damage after each off-road trip. Recognizing any damage and a subsequent timely repair reduces the chance of a possible breakdown or accident later on.

Proceed as follows:

앫 Switch off the LOW RANGE mode

( 컄 page 125).

앫 Remove excessive dirt from tires, wheels, wheel housings, and underbody.

For instance, after driving in mud, clean the radiator, chassis, engine, brakes, and wheels from extreme dirt using a strong jet of water.

앫

앫

앫

앫

Inspect frame, oil pan, brake hoses, etc., as well as vehicle underbody for possible damage.

Check tires for possible damage, clean all exterior lamps, and conduct a brake test.

Check for brush or branches caught in the undercarriage.

They could increase the possibility of a fire, as well as cut fuel and /or brake lines, puncture rubber bellows of the axles or drive shafts.

After continued operation in mud, sand, water or other dirty conditions clean the brake discs, wheels, brake pads and check and clean axle joints.

Trailer towing

Warning!

G

Failure to use proper equipment and driving technique can result in a loss of vehicle control when towing a trailer.

Improper towing or failure to follow the instructions contained in this guide can result in serious injury. Follow the guidelines below carefully to assure safe trailer operation.

Ask your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center should you require an explanation of information contained in this guide.

206

Operation


Trailer hitches

앫 Only install a trailer hitch receiver approved for your vehicle.

앫

For information on availability and installation, see your authorized


The bumpers on your vehicle are not designed for use with clamp-type hitches.

앫

Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches to them.

To reduce the possibility of damage, remove the hitch ball adaptor from the receiver when not in use.

Electrical connections

The vehicle is prewired to accept the seven-wire harness included in the

Mercedes-Benz approved trailer hitch receiver kit.

An additional four-pole conversion plug is included in the Mercedes-Benz supplied trailer hitch receiver kit.

For further information, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the maximum permissible vehicle weight:

6614 lbs (3000 kg).

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW):

Comprises weight of vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, passengers, cargo and trailer tongue. It must never exceed the GVWR.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the maximum permissible axle weight: front rear

2976 lbs

3858 lbs

(1350 kg)

(1750 kg)

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the maximum permissible trailer weight to be towed:

5000 lbs (2260 kg).

Trailer Tongue Weight Rating (TWR) is the maximum permissible weight on the trailer tongue:

500 lbs (225 kg) limit for Mercedes-Benz approved hitch receiver.

207

Operation


Loading a trailer

앫 When loading a trailer, you should observe that neither the permissible GTW, nor the GVWR are exceeded.

앫

Maximum permissible values are listed on the safety compliance certification labels for the vehicle and for the trailer to be towed.

The lowest value listed must be selected when determining how the vehicle and trailer are loaded.

The tongue weight at the hitch ball must be added to the GVW to prevent exceeding your Mercedes-Benz tow vehicle’s rear GAWR.

i

We recommend loading the trailer in such a manner that it has a tongue weight (TW) between 10% and 15% of the GTW.

Checking weights of vehicle and trailer

앫 To assure that the tow vehicle and trailer are in compliance with the maximum permissible weight limits have the loaded rig (tow vehicle including driver, passengers and cargo, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a commercial scale.

앫 Check the vehicle’s front and rear

Gross Axle Weight (GAW), the GTW and

TW.

The values as measured must not be exceeded, according to the weight listed under “Vehicle and trailer weight and ratings”.

Attaching a trailer

Observe maximum permitted trailer dimensions (width and length).

Most states and all Canadian provinces require

앫 safety chains between your tow vehicle and the trailer.

The chains should be crisscrossed under the trailer tongue. They must be attached to the hitch receiver, and not to the vehicle’s bumper or axle.

Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners.

앫

앫 a separate brake system at various trailer weights.

a break-away switch on trailers with a separate brake system.

The switch activates the trailer brakes in the possible event that the trailer might separate from the tow vehicle.

208

Operation


!

Do not connect a trailer brake system

(if trailer is so equipped) directly to the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system, as your vehicle is equipped with antilock brakes. If you do, neither the vehicle’s brakes nor the trailer’s brakes will function properly.

i

The provided vehicle electrical wiring harness for trailer towing has a brake signal wire (color orange) for hook-up to a brake controller.

You should consider using a trailer sway control system. For further information see your authorized


Towing a trailer

There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailer towing. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only for where you reside, but also for where you will be driving. A good source for this information can be the police or local authorities.

Note the following points, when driving with the trailer:

앫 In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic.

앫 Before you start driving check the

앫 trailer hitch

앫

앫

앫

앫 break-away switch safety chains electrical connections lighting and tires

Adjust the mirrors to permit unobstructed view beyond rear of trailer.

앫 If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving slowly, and then apply only the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working properly.

앫

앫

Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shifts while driving.

When towing a trailer, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that lighting and trailer brakes (if so equipped) are functioning properly.

앫 Take into consideration that when towing a trailer, the handling characteristics are different and less stable from those when operating the vehicle without a trailer.

It is important to avoid sudden maneuvers.

209

Operation


앫

앫

The vehicle and trailer combination is heavier, and therefore is limited in acceleration and climbing ability, and requires longer stopping distances.

It is more prone to reacting to side wind gusts, and requires more sensitive steering input.

If possible, do not brake abruptly, but rather engage the brake slightly at first to permit the trailer to activate its brake. Then increase the braking force.

!

If the trailer should begin to sway, reduce the vehicle’s speed and use the brake controller by hand to straighten out the vehicle and trailer.

In no case should you attempt to straighten out the tow vehicle and trailer by increasing the speed or oversteering and stepping on the brakes.

앫

앫

앫

If the transmission hunts between gears on inclines, manually shift to a lower gear (select 4, 3, 2 or 1).

A lower gear and reduction of speed reduces the chance of engine overloading and/or overheating.

On very steep inclines, not manageable with gear selector lever in position 1, switch transfer case to LOW RANGE mode ( 컄 page 125).

When going down a long hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine’s braking effect.

Avoid riding the brakes, thus overheating the vehicle and trailer brakes.

앫

앫

If the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature (coolant temperature needle approaching the red zone) when the air conditioning is on, turn off the air conditioning system.

Engine coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the climate control fan speed to high and setting the temperature control to the maximum hot position.

Extreme care must be exercised since your vehicle with a trailer will require additional passing distance ahead than when driving without a trailer.

Because your vehicle and trailer is longer than your vehicle alone, you will also need to go much farther ahead of the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

210

Operation


Passenger compartment

Warning!

G

Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle.

The rear cargo compartment is the preferred place to carry objects. Always use the partition net when transporting cargo. Partition net cannot secure hard or heavy objects. Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible using the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo floor area and fastening materials.

Driving abroad Control and operation of radio transmitters

Abroad, there is an extensive

Mercedes-Benz service network at your disposal. If you plan to drive into areas which are not listed in the index of your

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center directory, you should request pertinent information from your authorized Mercedes-Benz

Light Truck Center.

MCS, radio and telephone*

Warning!

G

Do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. Only operate the

MCS, radio or telephone

1

if road, weather and traffic conditions permit.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of approximately

44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.

1

Observe all legal requirements.

211

Operation


Telephones and two-way radios Catalytic converter

Warning!

G

Warning!

G

Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.

Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle.

Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.

Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with monolithic-type catalytic converters, an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Service Booklet.

!

To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle.

Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be repaired promptly.

Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter, causing it to overheat and start a fire.

As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

Emission control

Certain engine systems serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible legal limits.

These systems, of course, will function properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should, therefore, be carried out only by qualified

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center authorized technicians. Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover, the specified service jobs must be

212

Operation

Driving instructions carried out regularly according to

Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements.

For details refer to the Service Booklet.

Warning!

G

Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.

Do not run the engine in confined areas

(such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open at all times.

Coolant temperature

During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise to approx. 248°F

(120°C).

The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature in the red zone.

Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the


Warning!

G

앫

앫




213

Operation


왔


Refueling

Warning!

G

Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.

It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish all smoking materials. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline!

The fuel filler flap is located on the left-hand side of the vehicle towards the rear. Locking /unlocking the vehicle with the remote control automatically locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.

!

The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel filler neck. Do not drop the cap. It could damage the vehicle paint finish.

1 Fuel filler flap

2 Fuel cap

왘 Remove the key from the steering lock.

왘 Open the fuel filler flap 1 by pulling in direction of the arrow.

왘 Turn the fuel cap 2 to the left and hold on to it until possible pressure is released.

왘 Take off the cap.

왘 Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill.

!

To prevent damaging the lens of the plastic tail lamp, make certain that no gasoline comes into contact with it.

Warning!

G

Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas discharge. This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury.

214

왘 Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the right.

You will hear when the fuel cap is tightened.

왘 Close the fuel filler flap.

i

Use only premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).

Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump.

More information on gasoline can be found in the Factory Approved Service

Products pamphlet.

Operation

At the gas station i

Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the

? lamp to illuminate.

See also “Practical hints” section

( 컄 page 248).

Check regularly and before a long trip

왘 Open the hood ( 컄 page 217)

1 Engine oil level

2 Coolant level

For normal replenishing, use water (potable water quality). More information on the coolant level can be found in the

“Operation” section ( 컄 page 222).

3 Brake fluid

4 Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*

More information on filling the reservoir can be found in the “Operation” section ( 컄 page 224).

215

Operation


!

If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center immediately. Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem. For more information, see

“Practical Hints” ( 컄 page 245).

Vehicle lighting

Check function and cleanliness. More information on replacing light bulbs can be found in the “Practical hints” section

( 컄 page 266).

Tire inflation pressure

More information on tire inflation pressure can be found in the “Operation” section

( 컄 page 227).

Engine oil level

More information on engine oil see “Engine oil” ( 컄 page 218).

216

Operation


왔


Hood

Warning!

G

Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be forced open by passing air flow.

Opening

왘 Pull release lever 1 downwards.

The hood is unlocked. Handle 2 protrudes slightly from the radiator-grille.

If not, lift the hood slightly.

!

To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are folded forward away from the windshield.

왘 Pull up on the hood and then release it.

The hood will be automatically held open at shoulder height by gas-filled struts.

Warning!

G

To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running. Make sure the hood is properly closed before driving. When closing the hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers.

The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay clear of fan blades.

컄컄

1 Release lever

2 Handle for opening the hood

왘 Pull handle 2 to its stop out of the radiator-grille.

217

Operation


컄컄

Warning!

G

If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is overheated, do not open the hood. Move away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled. If necessary, call the fire department.

Warning!

G

앫

앫

앫

The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition system with the engine running while starting the engine if ignition is “on” and the engine is turned manually

Closing Engine oil

Warning!

G

Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone.

왘 Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft (30 cm).

The hood will lock audibly.

왘 Check to make sure the hood is fully closed.

If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps, then it is not properly closed. Open it again and let it drop with somewhat greater force.

!

Do not push the hood closed manually, as this could damage it.

The amount of oil your engine needs will depend on a number of factors, including driving style. Higher oil consumption can occur when

앫 the vehicle is new

앫 the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds

Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break-in period.

i

Do not use any special lubricant additives, as these may damage the drive assemblies. Using special additives not approved by Mercedes-Benz will restrict your warranty entitlement.

More information on this subject is available at any Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center.

218

Operation


Checking engine oil level via display

When checking the oil level the vehicle must

앫

앫

앫 be parked on level ground be at normal operating temperature have been stationary for at least five minutes with the engine turned off

To check the engine oil level via the display in the speedometer, do the following:

왘 Turn the key in the steering lock to position 2.

왘

왘

Wait until the display ----- appears in the speedometer display 2.

Within one second press button 1 twice.

One of the following messages will subsequently appear in the display:

앫 OIL i.O

The oil level is correct. Engine oil does not to be added.

앫 – 1.0 L

왘 Add 1.0 liter of engine oil.

앫 – 1.5 L

왘 Add 1.5 liters of engine oil.

앫 – 2.0 L

왘 Add 2.0 liters of engine oil.

For adding engine oil see ( 컄 page 302).

More information on engine oil can be found in the “Technical data” section

( 컄 page 300) and ( 컄 page 301).

1 Button

2 Display in speedometer

Other display messages

If there is excess engine oil with the engine at normal operating temperature, the following message will appear in the display:

OIL HI

The oil level is too high.

왘 Have excess oil siphoned.

!

Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty.

219

Operation


The display ----- flashes in the speedometer display, if a proper oil level check cannot be performed.

왘 If engine is at normal operating temperature, wait five minutes before repeating check procedure.

왘 If engine is not yet at normal operating temperature, wait 30 minutes before repeating check procedure.

i

Perform the engine oil level check with the dipstick if it cannot be completed via the speedometer display

( 컄 page 220).

In this case we recommend that you have the system checked at a


See the “Practical hints” section

( 컄 page 253) if the low engine oil level warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes.

앫

앫

앫

Checking engine oil level with the oil dipstick

When checking the oil level the vehicle must be parked on level ground be at normal operating temperature have been stationary for at least five minutes with the engine turned off i

The engine oil level can be checked by either the oil dipstick or via the speedometer display in the instrument cluster ( 컄 page 219). The amount of engine oil needed is shown more precisely in the speedometer display.

To check the engine oil level with the oil dipstick, do the following:

왘

왘

Open the hood ( 컄 page 217).

Pull out oil dipstick 1 ( 컄 page 221).

왘

왘

Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.

Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dipstick guide tube.

왘 Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after approximately three seconds to obtain accurate reading.

Oil dipstick

The oil level is correct when it is between the lower (min) and upper (max) mark of the oil dipstick.

220

Operation

Engine compartment i

The filling quantity between the upper and lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).

왘 If necessary, add engine oil.

For adding engine oil see ( 컄 page 221).



See the “Practical hints” section

( 컄 page 253) if the low engine oil level warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes.

Adding engine oil

!

Only use approved engine oils. For a listing of approved engine oils, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio.

In addition, check the oil filler cap for important information pertaining to the engine oil needing to meet a specific

Mercedes-Benz specification

(e.g. MB 229.5). If such information is printed on the oil filler cap, only use an engine oil from the list of approved engine oils in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet that meets the specification indicated on the oil filler cap. Using engine oils of other specification may cause the FSS to incorrectly determine the next service interval and will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty.

1 Oil dipstick

2 Filler cap

왘 Unscrew filler cap 2 from filler neck.

왘 Add engine oil as required. Be careful not to overfill with oil.

Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.

Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water.

컄컄

221

Operation


컄컄 !

Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty.

Transmission fluid level

The transmission fluid level does not need to be checked. If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center check the automatic transmission.

왘 Screw filler cap 2 back on filler neck.



Coolant

The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine must be cool.

Warning!

G

In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:

앫 Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.

앫 Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if engine temperature is above

194°F (90°C). Allow engine to cool down before removing cap. The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure.

앫 Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately ½ turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure.

앫 Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.

222

Operation


1 Cap

2 COLD LEVEL mark

The coolant level should reach the COLD

LEVEL mark 2 in the reservoir.

i

If the engine is already at its regular operating temperature, the coolant may be approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above the COLD LEVEL mark.

왘

왘

Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approximately one half turn to the left to release any excess pressure.

Continue turning the cap to the left and remove it.

왘

왘

Add coolant as required.

Replace and tighten cap.

More information on coolant can be found in the “Technical data” section

( 컄 page 304).

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compartment.

The battery should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve its rated service life. Refer to Service Booklet for battery maintenance intervals.

If you use your vehicle mostly for short-distance trips, you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently.

When replacing batteries, always use batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.

If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck

Center about steps you need to observe.

G Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries.

A

D

B

Risk of explosion

Keep flames or sparks away from battery. Do not smoke.

Battery acid is caustic. Do not allow it to come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.

In case it does, immediately flush affected area with clear water and seek medical help if necessary.

223

Operation


E

C

F

Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Follow the instructions in this

Operator's Manual.

Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly.

Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.

Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*

The windshield washer reservoir is located in the engine compartment.

1 Cap

Fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system* is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir. It has a capacity of 8.0 US qt (7.6 l).

During all seasons, add MB Windshield

Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix the windshield washer fluid in a suitable container.

왘 Use the tab to pull cap 1 upwards

(arrow).

왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield

Washer Concentrate “S” and water (or commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).

Always use washer solvent/antifreeze where temperatures may fall below freezing point. Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system/reservoir.

!

Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.

224

Warning!

G

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned.


“Technical data” section ( 컄 page 307).

Operation


225

Operation


왔



Truck Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation. They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase.

Warning!

G

Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part. See your authorized

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted:

앫

앫

The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged.

The correct operating clearance of the wheels and the tires are no longer guaranteed.

Warning!

G

Important guidelines

Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them.

When replacing rims, use only genuine

Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident.

Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be recognized on retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore not assure the operating safety of the vehicle when such tires are used.


Truck Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation.

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Use only sets of tires and rims of the same type and make.

Tires must be of the correct size for the rim.

Break in new tires for approximately

60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.

Regularly check the tires and rims for damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire pressure loss or damage to the tire beads.

If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire pressure and correct as required.

Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under

1

/

8 in (3 mm).

When replacing individual tires, you should mount new tires on the front wheels first.

226

Operation


!

When the wheels are heavily soiled, e.g. after driving through mud, clean the inside of the wheels with a jet of water.

Life of tire

Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread.

!

Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and gasoline.

Checking tire inflation pressure

Warning!

Direction of rotation

G

If the tire pressure drops repeatedly:

앫 Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects.

앫 Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim.

앫

앫

앫

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to:

Driving style

Tire pressure

Distance driven

Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must ensure that the tires rotate in the direction specified.

An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of rotation of the tire.

Warning!

G

Correct the tire pressure only when tires are cold.

Regularly check your tire pressure at intervals of no more than 14 days.

If the tires are warm, you should only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for current operating conditions.

A table on the fuel filler flap lists the specified tire inflation pressures for warm and cold tires as well as for various operating conditions.

227

Operation

Tires and wheels i

The pressures listed for light loads are minimum values offering high driving comfort.

Increased inflation pressures listed for heavier loads may also be used for light loads. These higher pressures produce favorable handling characteristics. The ride of the vehicle, however, will be somewhat harder. Never exceed the max. values or inflate tires below the min. values listed in the fuel filler flap.

Tire pressure changes by approximately

1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature.

Tire temperature and tire pressure are also increased while driving, depending on the driving speed and the tire load.

Warning!

G

Follow recommended inflation pressures.

Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes, etc.

Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) as indicated on the certification label on the driver’s door pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.

Check the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation. Spare tire will age and become worn over time even if never used, and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary.

Rotating wheels

Warning!

G

Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are of the same size,

The wheels can be rotated every 3000 to

6000 miles (5000 to 10 000 km) or sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear. The same direction of tire rotation must be retained.

Rotate the wheels before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible

(shoulder wear on front wheels and tread center wear on rear wheels).

Thoroughly clean the inner side of the wheels after each rotation. Check and ensure proper tire inflation pressure.

228

Warning!

G

Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a torque of

110 lb-ft (150 Nm).

Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.

Operation


229

Operation

Winter driving

왔

Winter driving

Before the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterized at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. This service includes:

앫 Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze concentration.

앫

앫

Addition of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windshield and headlamp cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate

“S” to a premixed windshield washer solvent /antifreeze which is formulated for temperatures below freezing point

( 컄 page 307).

Battery test. Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature.

A well charged battery helps to ensure that the engine can be started even at low ambient temperatures.

앫 Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately

1

/

6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the winter season.

Winter tires

Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, ESP, 4-ETS, and

EBP in winter operation.

For safe handling, ensure that all winter tires mounted are of the same make and have the same tread design.

Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the maximum speed for which your tires are rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver. Such notices are available at your tire dealer or any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck

Center.

Warning!

G

Warning!

G

Winter tires with a tread depth under

1

/

6 in

(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no longer suitable for winter operation.

If you use your spare tire when winter tires are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that the difference in tire characteristics may very well impair turning stability and that overall driving stability may be reduced.

Adapt your driving style accordingly.

Have the spare tire replaced with a winter tire at the nearest authorized


230

Block heater (Canada only)

The engine is equipped with a block heater.

The electrical cable may be installed at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center.

Snow chains

Snow chains should only be driven on snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow.

i

When driving with snow chains, you may wish to deactivate the ESP

( 컄 page 81) before setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve the vehicle’s traction.

Observe the following guidelines when using snow chains:

앫 Use of snow chains is not permissible with all wheel/tire combinations.

앫

앫

Snow chains should only be used on all four wheels. With only two chains available, they should be mounted on the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s mounting instructions.

Only use snow chains that are approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck

Center will be glad to advise you on this subject.

앫 Use of snow chains may be prohibited depending on location. Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains.

Operation

Winter driving

231

Operation

Maintenance

왔

Maintenance

We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by your authorized

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, in accordance with the Service Booklet at the times called for by the FSS (Flexible Service System).

Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Service Booklet at the designated times /mileage called for by the FSS may result in vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty.

FSS will notify you when your next service is due.

i

The interval between services depends on your driving habits. A gentle driving style, moderate engine speeds and the avoidance of short-distance trips will lengthen the interval between services.

Clearing the service indicator

1 Knob

2 Display in the speedometer

Approximately one month before your next service is due, the type of service is indicated in the speedometer display 2:

9

Minor service (A)

½

Major service (B)

The following information, depending on operating conditions throughout the year, is also shown:

앫 calculated distance remaining

앫 calculated remaining time in days

The service indicator is automatically cleared after ten seconds when you switch on the ignition or when reaching the service threshold while driving. You can also clear it yourself.

왘 Press knob 1.

232

Service term exceeded Resetting the service indicator

If you have exceeded the suggested service term:

앫 the

9 or ½ symbol appears in the display 2 for 30 seconds and a signal sounds after switching on the ignition.

앫 it is preceded by a “–” (minus symbol).

The Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will reset the service indicator following a completed service.

Calling up the service indicator

왘 Within one second press knob 1 twice.

The FSS display will appear for ten seconds.

In the event that the service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, you can reset the service indicator yourself.

왘 Switch ignition on and immediately press knob 1 twice within one second.

왘

The present status for days or distance is displayed.

Within ten seconds turn the key in steering lock to position 0 ( 컄 page 33).

왘 Press and hold knob 1 while switching the ignition on.

The present status for days or distance is displayed once more.

왘 Continue to hold knob 1.

After approximately ten seconds a signal sounds, and the display shows

10 000 miles (Canada: 15 000 km) for approximately ten seconds.

왘 Release knob 1.

Operation

Maintenance i

If the service indicator was inadvertently reset, have a Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center correct it.

Only reset if the proper service has been performed. Resetting the system without performing the proper service as called for by the FSS will cause the

FSS to incorrectly determine the next service interval which will result in engine damage not covered by the


If the battery is disconnected, the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the service indicator. To arrive at the true service deadline, you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the service indicator.

Do not confuse the service indicator with the engine oil level indicator

:.

233

Operation

Vehicle care

왔

Vehicle care

Cleaning and care of the vehicle

Warning!

G

Many cleaning products can be hazardous.

Some are poisonous, others are flammable.

Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the inside.

Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle.

While in operation, even while parked, your vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the underbody and cause lasting damage.

Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but also by:

앫 Air pollution

앫

앫

앫

Road salt

Tar

Gravel and stone chipping

To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Grease and oil

Fuel

Coolant

Brake fluid

Bird droppings

Insects

Tree resins, etc.

Frequent washing reduces and /or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences.

More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions:

앫 near the ocean

앫

앫 in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions) during winter operation

You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage.

Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion.

In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated.

Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by

Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others applied later.

234

Operation

Vehicle care

We have selected car-care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology.

You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products at your authorized


Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car-care products recommended here.

In such cases it is best to seek aid at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck

Center.

The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important

“how-to” information as well as references to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products.

Additional information can be found in the booklet entitled “Vehicle Care Guide”.

Power washer

When using a power washer for cleaning the vehicle, always observe manufacturer’s operating instructions.

!

Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire.

Always replace a damaged tire.

Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.

Tar stains

Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove. A tar remover is recommended.

Paintwork, painted body components

Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not “bead up”, normally every three to five months, depending on climate and washing detergent used.

Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be applied if the paint surface shows signs of dirt embedding (i.e. loss of gloss).

Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot.

Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle doors, etc.).

235

Operation

Vehicle care

Engine cleaning

Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from the intrusion of water and cleaning agents.

Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax, should be applied to the engine compartment after every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax.

Vehicle washing

Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo.

Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water. Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake. Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently.

Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish.

Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in outside mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors.

In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible.

When washing the underbody, do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.

Ornamental moldings

For regular cleaning and care of very dirty chrome-plated parts, use a chrome cleaner.

Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers, turn signal lenses

Use a mild car wash detergent, such as

Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water.

To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge.

236

Operation

Vehicle care

Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors

To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.

Wiper blades

왘 Fold wiper arm forward.

Warning!

G

1 Parktronic system sensors

왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as

Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water to clean the sensors 1.

When using a steam cleaner or power washer, aim nozzle only briefly from a minimum distance of 4 in (10 cm) at sensors 1.

For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove key from steering lock before cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise the wiper motor might suddenly turn on and cause injury.

왘 Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and detergent solution.

!

Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the key in the steering lock.

Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.

Window cleaning

왘 Fold wiper arms forward.

Warning!

G

For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove key from steering lock before cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise the wiper motor might suddenly turn on and cause injury.

왘 Use a window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.

An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.

237

Operation

Vehicle care

!

Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the key in the steering lock.


Light alloy wheels

Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care should be used for regular cleaning of the light alloy wheels.

If possible, clean wheels once a week with

Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, using a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water.

Follow instructions on container.

i

Only use acid-free cleaning materials.

Acid may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat.


Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use scouring agents.

Steering wheel and gear selector lever

Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved

Leather Care.

Cup holder

Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use scouring agents.

Hard plastic trim items

Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior

Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure.

Headliner and rear window shelf

Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt.

Seat belts

The webbing must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear, lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above 176°F

(80°C) or in direct sunlight.

Warning!

G

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

238

Upholstery

Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that has the tendency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be prevented.

MB Tex upholstery

Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior

Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure.

Plastic and rubber parts

Do not use oil or wax on these parts.

Leather upholstery*

Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with

Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.

Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not become wet.

Wood trims

Dampen cloth using water and use damp cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.

Do not use solvents like tar remover or wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these may be abrasive.

Operation

Vehicle care

239

240

Practical hints

What to do if …

Where will I find ...?

Unlocking /locking in an emergency

Opening /closing in an emergency

Replacing bulbs

Replacing wiper blades

Flat tire

Battery

Jump starting

Towing the vehicle

Fuses

241

Practical hints


왔


Lamps in instrument cluster

Problem

-

The yellow ABS warning lamp comes on while driving.

General information:

If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to light up during the bulb self-check when turning the key in steering lock to position 2, have it checked and replaced if necessary.

Possible cause

ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off. The BAS, ESP, 4-ETS and EBP are also switched off.

Suggested solution

왘 Continue driving with added caution.

Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability.

The brake system is still functioning normally but without ABS available.

왘 Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

The charging voltage has fallen below

10 volts. The ABS has switched off.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

When the voltage is above this value again, the ABS is operational again.

왘 If necessary, have the generator

(alternator) and the battery checked.

242

Practical hints


Problem Possible cause

7

The indicator lamp comes on.

A BabySmart

TM1

child seat is installed on the front passenger seat. The front passenger airbag is therefore switched off.


왘 The system is malfunctioning when there is no BabySmart

TM

child seat installed on the front passenger seat.

7

The indicator lamp does not light up with a BabySmart

TM

child seat properly installed on the front passenger seat.

The system is malfunctioning.

왘

Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized


Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat and check installation of the child seat

( 컄 page 67).

왘 If the light remains out, have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center.

Do not use the BabySmart

TM

restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

1

Baby Smart TM is trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.

243

Practical hints


Problem

É

The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving.

É

The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving and you hear a warning sound.

Possible cause

There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.


왘 Risk of accident! Carefully stop the vehicle and notify an authorized


Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.

You are driving with the parking brake set.

왘 Release the parking brake

( 컄 page 47).

Warning!

G

Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on. Don’t add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.

!

If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.

244

Practical hints


Problem

É

-

The red brake warning lamp comes on in addition to the yellow ABS malfunction lamp and you hear a warning sound.

¿

The yellow BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving.

Possible cause Suggested solution

There is a malfunction in the Electronic Brake

Proportioning (EBP) system.

왘 Have the system checked immediately at an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Light Truck Center.

The enhanced braking effect is not available.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accidents.

The self-diagnosis has not been completed.

The BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp will go out after driving a short distance at more than approx.12 mph (20 km/h).

245

Practical hints


Problem

¿



The ESP is no longer synchronized following a voltage supply interruption (e.g. battery disconnected or discharged).

Synchronize the ESP:

왘 With vehicle stationary and the engine running, turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right.

If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp does not go out:

왘 Continue driving with added caution.

왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Light Truck Center as soon as possible.


!

When synchronizing the ESP, make sure you can turn the steering wheel in both directions as far as it will go without the wheels hitting any objects, e.g. a road curb.

246

Practical hints


Problem

¿


¿



The charging voltage has fallen below

10 volts. The BAS and the ESP have switched off.

When the voltage is above this value again, the BAS and ESP are operational again.

왘

The BAS or the ESP is malfunctioning.

왘

If necessary, have the generator and the battery checked.

Continue driving with added caution.

왘 Have the BAS/ESP checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck



247

Practical hints


Problem

?

The yellow “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving.

Possible cause

There is a malfunction of:

앫

앫

앫

앫

The fuel management system

The ignition system

The emission control system

Systems which affect emissions

Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and may switch the engine to its limp-home (emergency operation) mode.


왘 Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an authorized


An on-board diagnostic connector is used by the service station to link the vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble codes. It is located in the front left area of the footwell next to the parking brake pedal.

The fuel cap is not closed tightly.

Your fuel tank is empty.

Check the fuel cap ( 컄 page 214).

왘 After refuelling start the engine three or four times in succession.

The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not need to have your vehicle checked.

248

Practical hints


Problem

/

The yellow coolant warning lamp comes on when the engine is running.

The coolant temperature gauge is above

248°F (120 °C).

Possible cause

The coolant is to hot.

The coolant level is too low.

If the warning lamp comes on frequently, there is a leak in the cooling system.

The coolant level is too low.

If the coolant level is correct, the electrical radiator fan may be broken.


왘 Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and coolant to cool down.

왘

왘

왘

Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary ( 컄 page 222).

Have the cooling system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center.

Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and coolant to cool down.

왘

왘

Add coolant to prevent engine from overheating ( 컄 page 222).

If the coolant temperature is below the red zone, drive on to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center.

Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving uphill) and stop-and-go driving.

249

Practical hints


Warning!

G




Warning!

G

Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.

Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You can be seriously burned.

!

Do not ignore the coolant warning lamps. Extended driving with the symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the


Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant. The engine will overheat, causing major engine damage.

250

Practical hints


Problem

v

The yellow 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp comes on steady while driving.

v

The yellow 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp flashes while driving.

Possible cause

The ESP is deactivated.


왘 Switch the ESP back on ( 컄 page 82).

Risk of accident!

Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions.

The ESP or 4-ETS has come into operation because of detected traction loss in at least one tire.

왘

If the ESP cannot be switched back on, have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

왘 During take-off, apply as little throttle as possible.

While driving, ease up on the accelerator.

왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions.

왘 Do not deactivate the ESP.

Exceptions: ( 컄 page 81).

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accidents.

251

Practical hints


Problem

{

The yellow ETS malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving.


4-ETS has switched off to prevent overheating of the brakes. Also see 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp ( 컄 page 251).

As soon as the brakes have cooled off,

4-ETS switches on again.

The indicator lamp goes out.

4-ETS is malfunctioning and has switched off.

왘 Have the 4-ETS checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

ê

The yellow LOW RANGE indicator lamp flashes after one or more switching conditions.

ê

The yellow LOW RANGE indicator lamp flashes after switching the ignition on.

The gear selection conditions have not been adhered to.

왘

LOW RANGE mode is malfunctioning.

Repeat the gear selection process

( 컄 page 125).

Have the LOW RANGE mode checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck

Center.

The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp comes on while driving.

The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.

왘 Refuel at the next gas station

( 컄 page 214).

왘 Check the fuel cap ( 컄 page 214).

The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp flashes when leaving the engine running.

The fuel cap is not closed tightly.

252

Practical hints


Problem

:

The yellow warning lamp flashes after starting the engine or while driving.


The engine oil level has sunk to the minimum level. If the engine oil level continues to sink, the warning lamp will light up.

왘

왘

Add approved oil at the next gas station ( 컄 page 302).

If oil loss is visible on the engine, have the malfunction corrected as soon as possible at a Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center.

_

The red indicator lamp does not go out after starting the engine.

‡

The green front fog lamp indicator lamp lights up when ignition is turned on.

<

The red seat belt warning lamp illuminates for a brief period after starting the engine.

W

The yellow low washer system fluid level lamp comes on after starting the engine or while driving.

The adjustable telescoping steering column is not properly locked.

The front fog lamps are switched on.

The warning lamp reminds you to fasten seat belts.

왘

There is approximately 1.3 US qt. (1.25 l) of washer fluid remaining in the reservoir.

The washer fluid may have frozen.

왘

왘

왘

왘

Lock the adjustable steering column

( 컄 page 39).

Fog lamps ( 컄 page 111).

Fasten your seat belt ( 컄 page 64).

Add washer fluid ( 컄 page 224).

Move the vehicle to a warmer environment so that the washer fluid will thaw.

왘 Correct the concentration level after the washer fluid in the reservoir thaws.

253

Practical hints


Problem

#

The red charge indicator lamp comes on when the engine is running.

Possible cause

The battery is no longer charging.

Possible causes:

앫

앫 alternator malfunctioning broken poly-V-belt

2

The yellow brake indicator lamp comes on during braking or after starting the engine.

The brake pads are worn down.

!

Brake pad thickness must be visually checked by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Service booklet.


왘 Stop immediately and check the poly-V-belt.

If it is broken

왘 Do not continue to drive, before the poly-V-belt is replaced.

왘

Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Light Truck Center.

Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck

Center.

254

Practical hints


Problem

1

The red SRS indicator lamp lights up while driving.

Possible cause

There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The airbags or emergency tensioning device (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident.


왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center.

Warning!

G

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately to have the system checked, otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could result in an accident/or injury to you or to others.

255

Practical hints


Additional indicators in the speedometer display

Display

9

´

Possible cause

Perform minor service (A) ( 컄 page 232).

Perform major service (B) ( 컄 page 232).

Á

î

The StArt message comes on in addition to the Error message.

The immobilizer is not operational.



Light Truck Center to perform service.


Light Truck Center to perform service.

왘 Contact an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the

USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

256

Practical hints


왔


First aid kit i

Check expiration dates and contents for completeness at least once a year and replace missing /expired items.

Vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit is stored in the cargo area behind the right trim panel.

The first aid kit is stored in the liftgate.

왘 Open and fold down panel 1.

The first aid kit can be removed.

1 Handles

2 Panel

왘 Turn handles 1 90° in direction of arrows.

왘 Fold down the panel 2.

3 Screw

4 Vehicle jack with tool kit

왘 Turn screw 3 counterclockwise.

왘 Remove vehicle jack.

Vehicles with CD-changer*

( 컄 page 258).

The jack is exclusively designed for lifting the vehicle during a wheel change. Always lower the vehicle on sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle.

257

Practical hints


1 Vehicle jack

2 Wheel bolt wrench

3 Screwdriver

4 Interchangeable slot

Screwdriver 3 is placed inside the wheelbolt wrench handle.

Vehicle jack

Please also observe the safety guidelines in the “Flat tire” section ( 컄 page 274) when using the jack.

Warning!

G

The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack.

Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface.

Make sure that the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle.

Vehicle with CD-changer*

To access the vehicle tool kit, swing the

CD-changer out of the panel.

1 Screw

2 CD-changer

왘 Turn screw 1 counterclockwise.

왘 Swing the CD-changer 2 out of the panel.

258

Practical hints


Spare wheel (space-saver tire) Removing spare wheel

Use the spare wheel only temporarily, while observing the following restrictions:

앫 Do not exceed vehicle speed of

50 mph (80 km/h).

앫

앫

Drive to the nearest repair facility to have the flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate.

Do not operate vehicle with more than one spare wheel mounted.

Warning!

G

Exercise care when removing or installing spare wheel to prevent personal injury.

The spare wheel is located behind the rear bumper.

Warning!

G

The dimensions of the spare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a mounted spare wheel.

i

Please comply with the instructions for

“Mounting the spare wheel”

( 컄 page 274).

1 Cover

왘 Hold left and right side of cover 1 and pull away from bumper.

2 Screw

3 Spare wheel carrier

4 Lever

왘 Turn screw 2 counterclockwise using the wrench ( 컄 page 258).

왘

Screw 2 remains in spare wheel carrier 3.

Lift spare wheel carrier slightly and push lever 4 to the right using screwdriver ( 컄 page 257).

왘 Swing spare wheel carrier 3 down and pull it out from under the bumper.

컄컄

259

컄컄

Practical hints


!

When storing the space-saver spare wheel in its holder, secure it using the bayonet lock.

왘

왘

5 Bayonet lock

왘 Turn the bayonet lock 5 90° to the left.

Pull off bayonet lock 5.

Remove the spare wheel cover and the spare wheel.

왘 Store bayonet lock 5 and spare wheel cover in cargo area.

왘 Replace the spare wheel carrier and secure it in place.

왘 Install cover 1 to the bumper.

260

왔

Unlocking/locking in an emergency

Unlocking the vehicle

Unlocking the driver’s door

If you are unable to unlock the driver’s door using the remote control, open the door using the key.

1 Release button

왘 Press release button 1 on the remote control.

The key folds out.

2 Unlocking

3 Locking

왘 Remove the protective cap from the door lock.

왘 Unlock the door with the mechanical key. To do so, push the mechanical key in the lock until it stops and turn it to the left.

Practical hints

Unlocking/locking in an emergency i

Unlocking and opening the driver’s door with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:

앫 Press button

Œ or ‹ on the remote control.

앫 Insert the key in the steering lock.

261

Practical hints


Locking the vehicle

If you are unable to lock the vehicle with the remote control, lock it with the mechanical key as follows:

왘 Close the passenger doors and the liftgate.

왘 Press the upper part of the central locking button in the cockpit

( 컄 page 93).

왘 Check to see whether the locking knobs on the passenger doors are still visible. If necessary push them down manually.

왘 Lock the liftgate if necessary from inside ( 컄 page 91).

왘 Lock the driver’s door with the mechanical key.

Changing batteries in the remote control

If the batteries in the remote control are discharged, the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked. It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning!

G

Keep the batteries out of reach of children.

If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help immediately.


Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.

i

When changing batteries, always replace both batteries.

The required replacement batteries are available at any Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center.

1 Release button

2 Battery cover

Replacement batteries: Lithium, type

CR 2025 or equivalent.

왘 Unfold the key by pressing release button 1.

262

Practical hints


왘

왘

Pull off battery cover 2 in direction of arrow.

Remove the batteries.

왘

왘

Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries under the contact spring with the plus (+) side facing up.

Press battery cover 2 onto housing until locked in place.

왘 Push each button to assure proper operation of the remote control.

If remote control does not function correctly after replacing the batteries, the system may have to be resynchronized.

Synchronizing remote control


( 컄 page 33), then to position 0 and remove.

왘

왘

Within ten seconds, push and hold button

‹ while pushing button

Œ five times.

Release the button, and press

‹,

Œ or Š once.

왘

The remote control is resynchronized.

Recheck all of the remote control functions.

i

If it is not possible to resynchronize the remote control, have the system checked at your authorized


Fuel filler flap

1 Cover

2 Lock rod

왘 Open the tailgate.

왘 Open cover 1 in cargo area behind the left trim panel.

왘 Turn lock rod 2 clockwise (arrow) to the end stop.

The fuel filler flap can now be opened.

263

Practical hints


Manually unlocking the transmission gear selector lever

In the case of power failure the transmission gear selector lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle.

1 Pin

왘 Insert a pin 1, e.g. ball point pen, into the covered opening below the position D of the shift pattern.

왘 Perform the following two steps simultaneously:

왘

왘

Push the pin down.

Move gear selector lever from position P.

왘 Remove pin 1.

The cover returns to its closed position after moving the gear selector lever to position D.

i

The gear selector lever is locked again when moving it to position P.

264

왔

Opening/closing in an emergency

Sliding/pop-up roof* 왘

You can open or close the sliding/pop-up roof manually should an electrical malfunction occur.

The sliding/pop-up roof drive is located behind the cover between the front interior lamps.

왘

왘

Pry off cover 3 using a flat blade srewdriver.

Obtain crank 2.

Insert crank 2 through hole.

i

Push crank 2 upward while turning it, to disengage the electric motor.

Practical hints

Opening/closing in an emergency

1 Hexagon drive hole

2 Crank

3 Cover

왘 Turn crank 2 clockwise to:

앫 slide roof closed

앫 raise roof at the rear

왘 Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to:

앫 slide roof open

앫 lower roof at the rear

The sliding/pop-up roof must be synchronized if it has been operated manually

( 컄 page 149).

265

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

왔

Replacing bulbs

Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all times.

Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important. Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for headlamp adjustment.

i

If the headlamps are fogged up on the inside as a result of high humidity, driving the vehicle a distance should clear out the fogging.

Bulbs

266

Front lamps

Lamp

1 Fog lamp

2 High beam

3 Low beam

4 Turn signal, parking, standing and side marker lamp

5 Additional turn signal

LED

Type

H8 (35 W)

H7 (55 W)

H7 (55 W)

Xenon* D2S-35 W

1157 NA

(32/3 cp bulb)

Rear lamps

Lamp

6 Brake lamp

Type

1073

(32 cp bulb)

7 Backup lamp

8 Turn signal lamp

9 Tail, parking and standing lamp

Rear fog lamp, driver’s side

1073

(32 cp bulb)

PY 21 W

P 21/4 W a Side marker lamp W 5 W b High mounted brake lamp

1073

(32 cp bulb) c License plate lamps C 5 W

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Notes on bulb replacement

Warning!

G

Keep bulbs out of reach of children.

Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.

앫

앫

앫

Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A bulb can explode if you: touch or move it when hot drop the bulb scratch the bulb

Wear eye and hand protection.

Because of high voltage in xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician.

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Use only 12-volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating.

Switch lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits.

Always use a clean lint-free cloth when handling bulbs.

Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease.

앫

앫

If the newly installed bulb does not light up, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Light Truck Center.

Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center:

앫 Additional turn signals in the exterior rear view mirrors

Bi-Xenon lamps*

Front fog lamps (vehicles with sport package)*

267

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Replacing bulbs for front lamps

Replacing low beam bulbs

1 Low beam halogen or Bi-Xenon* headlamp cover with locking tab

2 Electrical connector

Bi-Xenon* headlamp

Warning!

G

Do not remove the cover 1 for the

Bi-Xenon headlamp. Because of high voltage in xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician.

왘

왘

Halogen headlamp

왘 Switch off the lights.


Push down tab at top end of cover 1 and remove.

왘

왘

Pull electrical connector 2 off.

Unclip the retainer springs and take out the bulb.

왘

왘

왘

왘 Insert the new bulb so that the base locates in the recess on the holder.

Clip the retainer springs.

Plug the connector 2 onto the bulb.

Align headlamp cover and click into place.

268

High beam bulbs

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Turn signal, parking, standing and side marker lamp bulbs

왘

왘

1 High beam headlamp cover with locking tab



Twist cover 1 counterclockwise and remove.

왘

왘

왘

2 Electrical connector

왘 Pull electrical connector 2 off.

왘 Unclip the retainer springs and take out the bulb.

왘 Insert the new bulb so that the base locates in the recess on the holder.

Clip the retainer springs.

Plug the connector 2 onto the bulb.

Align headlamp cover and click into place.

왘

왘

1 Bulb socket



Twist bulb socket 1 counterclockwise and pull out.

왘 Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

왘 Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise.

왘 Reinstall the bulb socket.

컄컄

269

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

컄컄 왘 Align headlamp cover and click into place.

Fog lamp bulbs

Replacing bulbs for rear lamps

Tail lamp assemblies

왘

왘

Switch off the lights.

Open liftgate.

1 Fog lamp


왘 Use a suitable object (e.g. screwdriver) to press on the release lever behind the front panel.

왘

Front fog lamp 1 releases.

Remove fog lamp out of bumper.

왘

왘

왘

왘

2 Bulb socket

3 Tabs

왘 Twist bulb socket 2 counterclockwise to its end stop and pull out.

Pull bulb out of the bulb socket.

Insert new bulb in socket.

Reinstall bulb socket 2.

Twist bulb socket 2 clockwise to its end stop.

왘 Reinstall fog lamp into the bumper.

Make sure tabs 3 firmly seat into the slots of holder.

1 Screws

2 Tail, parking and standing lamp

Fog lamp, driver’s side

3 Side marker lamp

4 Turn signal lamp

5 Backup lamp

6 Brake lamp

왘

왘

Remove screws 1.

Remove tail lamp.

270

License plate lamp

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

High mounted brake lamp

7 Tabs

왘 Squeeze tabs 7 together and remove bulb holder.

왘

왘

Gently push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

Insert new bulb in socket, push in and turn clockwise.

왘

왘

Reinstall bulb holder. You should hear it engage.

Insert the tail lamp in the body, lower edge first. Make sure it engages.

왘 Retighten screws with washers on them.

1 License plate lamp

2 Screws


왘

왘

Loosen both screws 2 and remove lamp.

Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall lamp.

왘 Retighten the screws.

1 Cover

2 Tab


왘 Squeeze both sides of cover 1, fold it forward and remove.

왘 Press tab 2 on reflector and remove reflector.

왘 Gently push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

왘 Insert new bulb in socket, push in and turn clockwise.

컄컄

271

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

컄컄 왘 Insert reflector from the left so that it engages on the right.

왘 Position tabs of cover in slots and reinstall cover until properly seated.

Adjusting headlamp aim

Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important. To check and readjust a headlamp, follow the steps described:

왘 Park the vehicle on a level surface

25 feet (7.6 m) from a vertical test screen or wall.

왘 Switch the headlamps on

( 컄 page 110).

If the beam does not show a beam pattern as indicated in the figure left, then follow the steps below:

왘 Open hood ( 컄 page 217).

왘 Always turn adjustment screws 2 and 3 simultaneously for vertical adjustment until the headlamp is adjusted as shown 1. Turn clockwise for upward movement and counterclockwise for downward movement.

Graduations: screw 2: 0.50° pitch screw 3: 0.67° pitch

The left and right headlamps must be adjusted individually.

i

If it is not possible to obtain a proper headlamp adjustment, have the system checked at your authorized


V Vertical centerline

H Headlamp mounting high, measured from the center i

High beam adjustments simultaneously aim the low beam.

Vehicle should have a normal trunk load.

2 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw

3 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw

272

왔


Warning!

G

왘

왘

Press safety tab down 2.

Push wiper blade downward 1 and remove.

For safety reasons, remove key from steering lock before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury.

Installing

Removing

왘

왘

Fold the wiper arm forward.

Turn wiper blade at a right angle to wiper arm.

왘 Slide the wiper blade into end of wiper arm until it locks in place.

왘 Fold the wiper arm back to rest on the windshield. Make sure you hold onto the wiper when folding the wiper arm back.

Practical hints


!

Never open the hood when the wiper arms are folded forward.


Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted.

Make certain that the wiper blades are properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage.

For your convenience, we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

1 Wiper blade

2 Safety tab

273

Practical hints

Flat tire

왔

Flat tire

Mounting the spare wheel

Warning!

G

The dimensions of the spare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a mounted spare wheel. Adapt your driving style accordingly.

The spare wheel is for temporary use only.

When driving with spare wheel mounted, ensure proper tire pressure and do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center as soon as possible to have the spare wheel replaced with a regular road wheel.

Never operate the vehicle with more than one spare wheel mounted.

왘

왘

Preparing the vehicle

왘 Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving traffic on a hard surface.

Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

Engage the steering wheel lock in the straight ahead position and set the parking brake.

왘

왘

Move the gear selector lever to P.

Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway.

왘 Take the spare wheel out of its carrier

( 컄 page 259).

Lifting the vehicle

왘 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chocks

(not included) or other sizable objects.

When changing wheel on a level surface:

왘 Place one chock in front of and one behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed.

When changing wheel on a hill:

왘 Place chocks on the downhill side blocking both wheels of the other axle.

왘 Take the two-piece wheel wrench and the jack out of the rear compartment area ( 컄 page 257). Assemble wheel wrench.

274

Practical hints

Flat tire

Warning!

G

The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack.

Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Make sure that the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle.

왘 On wheel to be changed, loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately one full turn with wrench).

The jack take-up brackets are located directly behind the front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel housings.

!

Do not position the jack on the body of the vehicle, as this may cause damage to the vehicle.

1 Take-up bracket

2 Jack

왘 Place jack on firm ground.

왘 Position jack 2 under the take-up bracket 1 so that it is always vertical

(plumb-line) as seen from the side, even if the vehicle is parked on an incline.

왘 Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. Never start engine while vehicle is raised.

275

Practical hints

Flat tire

Removing the wheel

왘 Unscrew and remove all wheel bolts.

왘 Remove the remaining bolts.

!

Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.

This could result in damage to the bolt and wheel hub threads.

왘 Grip the wheel from the sides and remove it.

Mounting the new wheel

왘 Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub.

왘

왘

Install spare wheel on wheel hub.

Insert wheel bolts and tighten them slightly.

!

To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.

Warning!

G

Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.

Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.

Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call Roadside Assistance.

Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off. This could cause an accident.

Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts.

Warning!

G

Use only genuine equipment

Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose.

Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could tip over.

Lowering the vehicle

왘 Lower vehicle by turning crank counterclockwise until vehicle is resting fully on its own weight.

왘 Remove the jack.

276

Warning!

G

Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of

110 lb-ft (150 Nm).

1-5 Wheel bolts

왘 Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.

Observe a tightening torque of

110 lb-ft (150 Nm).

왘 Store jack and tool kit.

i

The removed road wheel cannot be stored in the spare wheel carrier, but should be transported in the rear cargo compartment wrapped in a protective cover supplied with the vehicle.

The protective cover is located in the rear cargo compartment behind the cover in the right side trim panel.

Practical hints

Flat tire

277

Practical hints

Battery

왔

Battery

The battery is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment.

1 Negative terminal

2 Positive terminal

Warning!

G

Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.

Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries

( 컄 page 223).

Never lean over batteries while connecting, you might get injured.

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary.

A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking etc.

!

Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running or the key is in the steering lock. Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be severely damaged.

Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center.

Refer to Service Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck

Center for further information.

Warning!

G

Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit.

Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident.

278

Practical hints

Battery

Disconnecting the battery Removing the batteries Reconnecting the batteries

Warning!

G

왘

왘

Remove the screw securing the battery.

Remove the battery support and bracket. Take out the battery.

With a disconnected battery

앫 you will no longer be able to turn the key in the steering lock

앫 the gear selector lever will remain locked in position P

Charging and reinstalling batteries

Warning!

G

왘 Depress parking brake firmly or move gear selector lever to position P.

Turn off all electrical consumers.

왘

왘

왘

왘

왘

Remove key from the steering lock.


Disconnect the battery negative lead.

Remove the cover from the positive terminal.

왘 Disconnect the battery positive lead.

Never charge a battery while still installed in the vehicle. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.

왘

왘

Charge battery in accordance with the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer.

Reinstall the charged battery. Follow the previously described steps in reverse order.

왘

왘


Connect the positive lead and fasten its cover.

왘 Connect the negative lead.

!

Never invert the terminal connections!

!

The battery, its filler caps and the vent tube must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation.

279

Practical hints

Battery i

The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of battery power (e.g. due to reconnection):

앫 Set the clock ( 컄 page 118).

앫

앫

Set the date in trip computer

( 컄 page 186).

Calibrate the compass

( 컄 page 188).

앫

앫

Resynchronize the ESP

( 컄 page 246).

Resynchronize side power windows

( 컄 page 146).

앫 Resynchronize sliding/pop-up roof*( 컄 page 149).


Large 12-volt storage batteries contain lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.

280

왔

Jump starting

Warning!

G

Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death.

Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting, you might get injured.

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary.

A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and very explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc.

Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury.

Read all instructions before proceeding.

If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:

앫 Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.

앫

앫

Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.

Only jump start from batteries with the same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting with a more powerful battery could damage the vehicle's electrical system, which will not be covered by the


앫

앫

Use only jumper cables with sufficientcross-section and insulated terminal clamps.

Always make sure the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts that move when the engine is started or running.

Practical hints

Jump starting

!

Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.

Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit.

If engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest authorized


Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter and may present a fire risk.

Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation.

Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery.

281

Practical hints

Jump starting

Warning!

G

Keep flames or sparks away from battery.

Do not smoke.

Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries

( 컄 page 223).

!

Never invert the terminal connections.

왘

왘

왘

왘

왘

The battery is located on the right side of the engine compartment.

왘 Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.


Apply parking brake.

Shift gear selector lever to position P.

Open the hood.

Connect positive terminals 1 and 4 of the batteries with the jumper cable.

Clamp cable to positive terminal 4 of charged battery first.

1 Positive terminal of discharged battery

2 Negative terminal of discharged battery

3 Negative terminal of charged battery

4 Positive terminal of charged battery

왘 Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery and run at idle speed.

왘 Connect negative terminals 2 and 3 of the batteries with the jumper cable.

Clamp cable to negative terminal 3 of charged battery first.

왘 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.

Now you can turn on the electrical consumers. Do not turn on the lights under any circumstances.

왘 Remove the jumper cables first from the negative terminals 2 and 3 and then from positive terminals 1 and 4.

You can now turn on the lights.

왘 Have the battery checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz

Light Truck Center.

!

Do not tow-start the vehicle.

282

왔


Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. This method is preferable to other types of towing.

!

Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment, with key in steering lock turned to position 0.

Do not tow with sling-type equipment.

Towing with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports.

To prevent damage during transport, do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts. Use the towing eyes.

Switch off the ESP ( 컄 page 81), tow-away alarm ( 컄 page 85) and the automatic central locking ( 컄 page 93).

When circumstances do not permit the recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground only so far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be employed.

!

When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, the gear selector lever must be in position N and the key must be in steering lock position 2.

When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles

(50 km) and at a speed not to exceed

30 mph (50 km/h).

If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised (observe instructions regarding flexible drive shaft), the engine must be shut off (key in steering lock position 1). Otherwise, the 4-ETS may become engaged which may cause loss of towing control.

Practical hints


!

To be certain to avoid additional damage to the vehicle powertrain, however you should observe the following:

앫 With damage to the front axle

앫

앫 raise front axle remove flexible drive shaft between rear axle and transfer case

앫

앫

앫

앫

With damage to the rear axle raise rear axle tow vehicle with wheel lift or dolly placed under front wheels

With damage to the transfer case

앫 remove flexible drive shaft to the drive axles

Always install new self-locking nuts when reinstalling flexible drive shaft.

283

Practical hints


Warning!

G

앫

앫

If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, always tow with a tow bar if: the engine will not run there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system

Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, make certain that the key is in steering lock position 2.

If the key is left in steering lock position 0 for an extended period of time, it can no longer be turned in the switch. In this case, the steering is locked. To unlock, remove key from steering lock and reinsert.

Warning!

G

With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.

i

To signal turns while being towed with hazard warning flasher in use, turn key in steering lock to position 2 and activate combination switch for left or right turn signal in usual manner – only the selected turn signal will operate.

Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.

i

The vehicle cannot be started via tow-start.

!

When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, note the following:

With the automatic central locking activated and the key in steering lock position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel is turning at vehicle speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.

To prevent the vehicle doors from locking, deactivate the automatic central locking ( 컄 page 93).

Towing of the vehicle should only be done using the towing eye. Never attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts.

284

Practical hints

Towing the vehicle i

The gear selector lever will remain locked in position P and the key will not turn in the steering lock if the battery is disconnected or discharged. See notes on the battery ( 컄 page 278) or on jump starting ( 컄 page 281).

Manual unlocking transmission gear selector lever ( 컄 page 264).

Front towing eye

The front towing eye is located on the passenger side below the bumper.

The rear towing eye is located behind the right side cover in the bumper panel.

1 Towing eye

Rear towing eye

Warning!

G

In order to avoid possible serious burns or injury, use extreme caution when removing the cover, because the rear exhaust pipe is extremely hot.

ML 350, ML 500

1 Cover

2 Towing eye

To remove cover:

왘 Pry out the cover 1 using a flat blade screwdriver ( 컄 page 257).

To reinstall cover:

왘 Engage cover at bottom and press in top securely.

285

Practical hints


Vehicles with sport package*

1 Cover

2 Towing eye

To remove cover:

왘 Grip cover 1 at bottom and securely pull out.

To reinstall cover:

왘 Engage cover and press in securely.

Stranded vehicle

Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the wheels are dug into sand or mud, should be done with the greatest of care, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded.

Avoid pulling the vehicle jerkily or diagonally, since it could result in damage to the chassis alignment.

Never try to free a vehicle that is still coupled to a trailer.

If possible, a vehicle equipped with trailer hitch receiver should be pulled backward in its own previously made tracks.

286

왔

Fuses i

Only install fuses that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz and that have the specified amperage rating.

Never attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse. Have the cause determined and remedied by an authorized


Fuse box in engine compartment

The fuse box is located in the engine compartment on the left-hand side.

The fuse chart is printed on the corresponding fuse box cover. The amperages of the fuses are also indicated there.

1 Clamps

2 Fuse box cover

왘

왘

Removing / installing cover

왘 Release clamps 1.

Lift fuse box cover 2 up.

Install cover 1 in reverse order.

3 Fuse chart

4 Fuse extractor

5 Spare fuses

Practical hints

Fuses

287

Practical hints

Fuses

Auxiliary fuse box in front passenger footwell

The auxiliary fuse box is located in the front passenger compartment.

Removing / installing cover

왘 Turn both locks 1 90° counterclockwise.

왘

왘

Remove cover 2 in direction of arrow.

Install cover 2 in reverse order.

1 Lock

2 Cover

288

Technical data

Spare parts service

Warranty coverage

Identification labels

Layout of poly-V-belt drive

Engine

Rims and tires

Electrical system

Main Dimensions

Weights

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

Consumer information

289

Technical data


The “Technical data” section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle.

왔


All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a stock of genuine

Mercedes-Benz Parts parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service.

More than 300 000 different spare parts for Mercedes-Benz models are available.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz spare parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections.

Each part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz spare parts should be installed.

!

The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which is not covered by the

Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety.

290

앫

앫

앫

왔


Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the “warranties” printed in the Service and

Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck

Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed on the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties:

앫 New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emission System Warranty

Emission Performance Warranty

California, Maine, Massachusetts, and

Vermont Emission Control Systems

Warranty

Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts and Accessories warranties, copies of which are available at any Mercedes-Benz

Center.

Loss of Service and Warranty

Information Booklet

Should you lose your Service and Warranty

Information booklet, have your authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.

Technical data


291

Technical data


왔


1 Certification label and Paintwork number

2 Engine number (engraved on engine)

3 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)

4 Emission control label

Vacuum line routing for emission control system

5 Information label, California version i

When ordering spare parts, please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers.

292

왔


1 Automatic belt tensioner

2 Power steering pump

3 Air conditioning compressor

4 Crankshaft

5 Coolant pump

6 Generator (alternator)

7 Idler pulley

Technical data


293

Technical data

Engine

왔

Engine

Model

Engine

Mode of operation

No. of cylinders

Bore

Stroke

Total piston displacement

Compression ratio

Output acc. to SAE J 1349

ML 350 (163.157

1

)

112

4-stroke engine, gasoline injection

6

3.81 in (97.00 mm)

3.31 in (84.00 mm)

227 cu in (3724 cm

3

)

10:1

232 hp/5750 rpm

(173 kW/5750 rpm)

ML 500 (163.175)

113

1

4-stroke engine, gasoline injection

8

3.81 in (97.00 mm)

3.31 in (84.00 mm)

303 cu in (4966 cm

3

)

10:1

288 hp/5600 rpm

(215 kW/5600 rpm)

Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 254 lb-ft/3000-4500 rpm

(345 Nm/3000-4500 rpm)

Maximum engine speed

Firing order

6000 rpm

1-4-3-6-2-5

325 lb-ft/2700 rpm

(440 Nm/2700 rpm)

6000 rpm

1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8

Poly-V-belt 2 370 mm 2370 mm

1

The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.

294

앫

앫

왔

Rims and tires

Use only tires and rims which have been specifically developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Other tires and rims can have detrimental effects, such as

앫 poor handling characteristics increased noise increased fuel consumption

!

Moreover, tires and rims not approved by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteristics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts. This may result in damage to the tires or the vehicle.

Technical data

Rims and tires i

Further information on tires and rims is available at any authorized

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. A tire inflation pressure table is located on the fuel filler cap of the vehicle. The tire pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with vehicle.

Rims and tires

Model

Rims (light alloy)

Wheel offset

All-season tires (radial-ply tires)

Rims* (light alloy)

Wheel offset*

All-season tires (radial-ply tires)*

ML 350

8 J x 17 H2

2.0 in (52 mm)

255/60 R17 106 H

8

1

/

2

J x 17 H2

1.85 in (47 mm)

275/55 R17 109 V

ML 500

8

1

/

2

J x 17 H2

2.0 in (52 mm)

275 /55 R17 109 V

8

1

/

2

J x 17 H2

1.85 in (47 mm)

275 /55 R17 109 V

295

Technical data

Rims and tires

Spare wheel

Model

Rim

Wheel offset

Space-saver tire

1

Must not be used with snow chains.

ML 350, ML 500

4 Jx18 H2 ET0

0 in (0 mm)

T155/90 D18 113M

1

296

왔


Model

Generator (alternator)

Starter motor

Battery

Spark plugs

Electrode gap

Tightening torque

ML 350

14 V/120 A

12 V/1.7 kW

12 V/100 Ah

Bosch F 8 DPP332

Bosch F 8 DPER

0.039 in (1.0 mm)

15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm)

Technical data


ML 500

14 V/150 A

12 V/1.7 kW

12 V/100 Ah

Bosch F 8 DPP332

Bosch F 8 DPER

0.039 in (1.0 mm)

15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm)

297

Technical data

Main Dimensions

왔

Main Dimensions

Model

Overall vehicle length

Overall vehicle width

Overall vehicle height

Wheelbase

Track, front

Track, rear

Ground clearance

Turning radius

ML 350, ML 500

182.6 in (4638 mm)

83.7 in (2126 mm)

71.7 in (1820 mm)

111.0 in (2820 mm)

61.2 in (1555 mm)

61.2 in (1555 mm)

8.03 in (204 mm)

468.5 in (11.9 m)

298

왔

Weights

Roof load max.

220 lbs (100 kg)

Technical data

Weights

299

Technical data


왔


Capacities Therefore use only brands tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match.

Model Capacity

ML 350, ML 500 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

Engine with oil filter


Transfer case

Rear axle

Front axle

Power steering

Front wheel hubs

1.6 US qt (1.5 l)

1.3 US qt (1.25 l)

1.2 US qt (1.1 l) approx. 0.65 US qt (0.6 l) approx. 1.5 oz (43 g) each

Please refer to the Factory Approved

Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.


Approved engine oils

MB Automatic Transmission Oil

(Dexron 3 or Dexron 2E)

(Hypoid gear oil SAE 90, 85 W 90)

(Hypoid gear oil SAE 90)

MB Power Steering Fluid

High temperature roller bearing grease

300

Technical data


Cooling system

Fuel tank

Model Capacity approx. 12.7 US qt (12.0 l)

ML 350, ML 500 22.0 US gal (83.0 l)


MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze

Premium unleaded gasoline:

Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON including a reserve of approx. 3.2 US gal (12.0 l)

Air conditioning system R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12)

MB Windshield Washer Concentrate

1

Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning

system*

8.0 US qt (7.6 l)

1

Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/ antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios (

컄 page 307).

301

Technical data


Engine oils

Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines. Therefore, use only engine oils approved by

Mercedes-Benz. Information on approved engine oils is available in the Factory

Approved Service Products pamphlet, or at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center.

!

Always check the oil filler cap

( 컄 page 221) for important information pertaining to the engine oil needing to meet a specific Mercedes-Benz specification (e.g. MB 229.5). If such information is printed on the oil filler cap, only use an engine oil from the list of approved engine oils in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet that meets the specification indicated on the oil filler cap.

Using engine oils of other specification may cause the FSS to incorrectly determine the next service interval and will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Engine oil additives

Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.

They may damage the engine.

Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Air conditioning refrigerant

R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil is used in the air conditioning system.

Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the system will occur.

Brake fluid

During vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the system’s efficiency.

Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced every two years, preferably in the spring.

Only brake fluid approved by

Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck

Center will provide you with additional information.

302

Technical data


Premium unleaded gasoline Fuel requirements Gasoline additives

!

To maintain the engine’s durability and performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions:

앫 Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon as possible.

앫

앫

앫

Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration.

Do not exceed an engine speed of

3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two persons and no luggage.

Do not exceed

2

/

3

of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain.

Use only premium unleaded meeting

ASTM standard D 439:

앫 The octane number (posted at the pump) must be 91 min. It is an average of both the Research (R) octane number and the Motor (M) octane number:

(R+M)/2). This is also known as the

ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed

10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.

The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.

Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used.

These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements, such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the use of quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits.

After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as:

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Warm-up hesitation

Unstable idle

Knocking/pinging

Misfire

Power loss

Do not blend other specific fuel additives with fuel. This only results in unnecessary costs and may be harmful to the engine operation.

303

Technical data


Damage or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending specific fuel additives are not covered by the


Coolants

앫

앫

앫

The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion / antifreeze, which provides:

Corrosion protection

Freeze protection

Boiling protection (by increasing the boiling point)

The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately -35°F (-37°C) and corrosion protection.

If the antifreeze mixture is effective to

-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).

The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase in boil-over protection. Refer to Service Booklet for replacement interval.

To provide important corrosion protection, the solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze protection to approx. - 22°F

[-30°C]). If you use a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection to approx. - 49°F [-45°C]), the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.

If the coolant level is low, water and MB anticorrosion/antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage).

Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instructions.

The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements, which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water. If you are not sure about the water quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light

Truck Center.

304

Anticorrosion/ antifreeze

Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.)

Therefore, the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle:

Mercedes-Benz Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.

Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in hot southern regions), you should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz

Light Truck Center for service.

Technical data


305

Technical data


Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity

Model Approx. freeze protection

– 35°F (– 37°C) – 49°F (– 45°C)

ML 350, ML 500, 6.4 US qt (6.0 l) 7.0 US qt (6.6 l)

306

Technical data


Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*

Both the windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system* are supplied from the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

The windshield and headlamp washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of approx.

8.0 US qt (7.6 l).

왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield

Washer Concentrate “S” and water (or concentrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).

Warning!

G

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned.

Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio

For temperatures above freezing, use

MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water:

앫 1 part “S” to 100 parts water

[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) water].

For temperatures below freezing, use

MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:

앫 1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent

[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) solvent].

307

Technical data


왔


This has been prepared as required of all manufacturers of passenger cars under

Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,

Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.

Uniform tire quality grading

Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Tread wear

200 these grades.

Traction

AA

Temperature

A

All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning!

G

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

308

Temperature

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning!

G

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.

Technical data


309

310

Technical terms

ABS

(Antilock Brake System)

Prevents the wheels from locking up during braking so that the vehicle can continue to be steered.

BabySmart

TM

airbag deactivation system

This system detects if a special system compatible child restraint seat is installed on the front passenger seat. The system will automatically deactivate the passenger front airbag when such a seat is properly installed (indicator lamp

7 in the instrument cluster lights up). See your authorized

Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for availability.

BabySmart

TM

compatible child seats

Special restraint system for children.

The sensor system for the passenger seat prevents deployment of the passenger front airbag if a BabySmart

TM compatible child seat is installed.

BAS

(Brake Assist System)

System for potentially reducing braking distances in emergency braking situations. The system is activated when it senses an emergency based on how fast the brake is applied.

Bi-Xenon headlamps*

Headlamps which use an electric arc as the light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps.

Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low beam and high beam.

CAC

(Customer Assistance Center)

Mercedes-Benz customer service center, which can help you with any questions about your vehicle and provide assistance in the event of a breakdown.

CAN system

(Controller Area Network)

Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or windshield wiping.

Cockpit

All instruments, switches, buttons and indicator/warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle operation and monitoring.

Cruise control

Driving convenience system for automatically maintaining the vehicle speed set by the driver.

Engine number

The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the cylinder block to uniquely identify each engine produced.

311

Technical terms

Engine oil viscosity

Measurement for the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The higher the temperature an oil can tolerate without becoming thin, or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without becoming viscous, the better the viscosity.

ESP

(Electronic Stability Program)

Improves vehicle handling and directional stability.

ETD

(Emergency Tensioning Device)

Device which deploys in certain frontal and rear collisions exceeding the system's threshold to tighten the seat belts.

->SRS

FSS

(Flexible Service System)

Service indicator in the speedometer display that informs the driver when the next vehicle maintenance service is due.

Gear range

Number of gears which are available to the automatic transmission for shifting.

The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the gear selector lever.

GPS

(Global Positioning System)

Satellite-based system for relaying geographic location information to and from vehicles equipped with special receivers. Employs CD or DVD digital maps for navigation.

GAWR

(Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle must never exceed the

GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the certification label located on the driver’s door pillar.

GVW

(Gross Vehicle Weight)

The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, passengers and cargo. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR, indicated on the certification label located on the driver’s door pillar.

312

Technical terms

GVWR

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

This is the maximum permissible vehicle weight. It is indicated on certification label located on the driver’s door pillar.


The displays and indicator/warning lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer, engine temperature and fuel gauge.

Kickdown

Depressing the accelerator past the point of resistance shifts the transmission down to the lowest possible gear.

This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal acceleration needs.

Line of fall

The direct line that an object moves downhill when influenced by the force of gravity alone.

Lock button

Button on the door which indicates whether the door is locked or unlocked. Pushing the lock button down on an individual door from inside will lock that door.

MCS

(Modular Control System)

Information and operating center for vehicle sound and communications systems, including the radio and the radio and navigation system, as well as for other optional equipment (CD changer, telephone, etc.).

Memory function*

Used to store three individual seat, steering wheel and mirror positions.

MON

(Motor Octane Number)

The Motor Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation

(knocking). The average of both the

MON (Motor Octane Number) and

->RON (Research Octane Number) is posted at the pump, also known as

ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

Multifunction display

A display field in the instrument cluster used to present information provided by the control system.

Parktronic system* (Parking assist)

System which uses visual and acoustic signals to assist the driver during parking maneuvers.

313

Technical terms

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Poly-V-belt drive

Drives engine-components (alternator,

AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.

Power train

Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit motive power to the drive axles, including engine clutch/torque converter transmission transfer case drive shaft differential axle shafts/axles

Remote Vehicle Diagnostics

Transmission of vehicle data and current location to the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center for subscribers to Tele Aid service.

REST

(Residual engine heat utilization)

Feature that uses the engine heat stored in the coolant to heat the vehicle interior for a short time after the engine has been turned off.

Restraint system

Seat belts, belt tensioner, airbags and child seat restraint systems. As independent systems, their protective functions complement one another.

RON

(Research Octane Number)

The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both the ->MON (Motor Octane Number) and RON (Research Octane Number) is posted at the pump, also known as

ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

Shift lock

When the vehicle is parked, this lock prevents the transmission selector lever from being moved out of position P without key turned and brake pedal depressed.

SRS

(Supplemental Restraint System)

Seat belts, emergency tensioning device and airbags. Though independent systems, they are closely interfaced to provide effective occupant protection.

314

Technical terms

Tele Aid System*

(Telematic Alarm Identification on

Demand)

The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response: automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance and information. Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call.

The Tele Aid system is operational provided that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.

Telematics*

A combination of the terms “telecommunications” and “informatics”.

Tightening torque

Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug wrench) with which threaded fasteners such as wheel bolts are tightened.

Tire speed rating

Part of tire designation; indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved.

Traction

Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires.

Transfer case

Speed of rotation/torque converter that works together with the ->automatic transmission. In the LOW mode off-road position, the transfer case decreases the output rotational speed of the ->automatic transmission by approximately half. This results in a corresponding increase of torque on the drive axles.

The vehicle then has nearly double the driving force but drives only approximately half as fast.

TWR

(Tongue Weight Rating)

The TWR is the maximum permissible weight on the trailer tongue.

VIN

(Vehicle Identification Number)

The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the body to uniquely identify each vehicle produced.

Voice control system*

Voice control system for car phones, portable cell phones and audio systems (radio, CD, etc.).

315

316

Index

A

ABS 25, 76, 311

ABS control 76

LOW RANGE mode 77

Malfunction indicator lamp 242

Warning lamp 242

Accelerator position, automatic transmission 123

Accident

In case of 52

Activating

Air circulation mode 139

Air recirculation mode 139

Anti-theft alarm system 83

Automatic climate control 135

ESP 82

Exterior headlamps 48

Hazard warning flasher 112

Headlamps 48

High beams 110

Ignition 33

Immobilizer 54, 83

Rear passenger compartment ventilation and climate control 141

Rear window defroster 133

Rear window wiper 51

Residual heat 140

Seat heater* 98

Tow-away alarm 85

Warning indicators (Parktronic*) 155

Windshield wipers 50

Activating automatic central locking 93

Adding

Coolant 223

Engine oil 221

Additional turn signals 266

Adjustable steering column

Indicator lamp 253

Adjusting 34

Backrest tilt 36, 38

Exterior rear view mirror 40

Head restraint height 36, 38

Head restraint tilt 37, 39

Headlamp aim 272

Instrument cluster illumination 116

Manual seat 35

Mirrors 40

Power seats* 37

Seat cushion tilt 38

Seat fore and aft 35

Seat fore and aft adjustment 37

Seat height 36, 38

Seats 34

Steering wheel 39

Adjusting air distribution


Adjusting air volume


Air conditioner (cooling)

Turning on 139

Air conditioning

Cooling 139

317

Index

Air conditioning refrigerant 302

Air outlets


Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure 227


Activating 139

Deactivating 139

AIRBAG OFF

Warning lamp 243

Airbags 59

BabySmart

TM

airbag deactivation system 311

BabySmart

TM

deactivation system 70

Children 60

Front 63

Passenger 63

Safety guidelines 62

Side impact 64

Window curtain 64

Alarm

Audible 75, 84, 86

Canceling 84, 86

Visual 83

Alarm system

Anti-theft 83

Anticorrosion/antifreeze 305

Antiglare

Automatic 126

Antilock brake system (ABS) 311

Anti-theft alarm system

Arming 83

Canceling alarm 84, 86

Disarming 84

Anti-theft systems


Immobilizer 83

Tow-away alarm, glass breakage sensor 84

Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning 197

Armrest

Storage compartment in front of 165

Storage spaces 165

Armrest in rear seat bench 167

Ashtray

Front center console 168

Rear center console 169

ATF (automatic transmission fluid) 222

Attaching a trailer 208

Automatic antiglare for rear view mirror 126

Automatic central locking

Activating 93

Deactivating 93


Adjusting air distribution 137

Adjusting air volume 137

Air conditioning 139

Air outlets 142


Basic setting 137

Changing basic setting 137

Defrosting 138

Economy mode 135

318

Index

Rear passenger compartment 141


Residual heat utilization 140

Residual ventilation 140

Switching off 137

Switching on 137

Automatic headlamp mode 108

Automatic interior lighting control

Activating 113

Deactivating 113

Automatic locking when driving 93

Automatic transmission 119

Accelerator position 123

Emergency operation (Limp Home

Mode) 124

Gear ranges 121

Gear selector lever position 122

Gear shifting malfunctions 124

Kickdown 123

Manual shifting 120

One-touch gearshifting 120

Selector lever position 119

Towing a trailer 124

Transmission fluid 222

B

BabySmart

TM

Airbag deactivation system 70

Compatible child seats 70, 311

Self-test 70

BabySmart

TM


Backrest tilt 35

Backup lamps 267, 270

Bulbs 267

BAS 78, 311

Malfunction indicator lamp 245, 246,

247

Warning lamp 245, 246, 247

Batteries, remote control

Changing 262

Batteries, vehicle 223

Battery discharged

Jump starting 281

Battery indicator lamp

Indicator lamp 254

Battery, vehicle 223, 278

Charging 279

Disconnecting 279

Reconnecting 279

Reinstalling 279

Removing 279

Bi-Xenon headlamps* 311

Blocking

Rear door window operation 73

Brake assist system (BAS) 311

Brake fluid 302

Brake lamp bulbs 267

Brake lamp, high mounted 267

Brake pad wear

Indicator lamp 254

Brakes 194

Warning lamp 244

Break-in period 192

319

Index

Bulbs, replacing 266

Additional turn signals 266

Backup lamps 267

Brake lamps 267

Fog lamps 266

Front fog lamp 270

Front lamps 266

High beam 266

High mounted brake lamp 267, 271

License plate lamps 267, 271

Low beam 266

Parking lamps 266, 267, 269

Rear fog lamp 267

Rear fog lamps 270

Rear side marker lamp bulbs 270

Side marker lamps 266, 267, 269

Standing lamps 266, 267

Tail lamp assemblies 267, 270

Turn signal lamps 266, 267, 269

C

CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 311

Calibrating compass 188

California

Important notice 11

Calling up

Service indicator 233

CAN system 311

Capacities

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

300

Cargo area cover blind* 161

Closing 161

Installing 162

Opening 161

Removing 161

Cargo area see Cargo compartment 89

Cargo compartment

Liftgate 89

Lighting 114

Tie-down rings 158

Cargo floor plates 162

Installing 163

Removing 162

Storing 162

Cargo tie-down rings 158

Catalytic converter 212

CD-changer* 258

Center console 27

Lower part 28

Upper part 27

Central locking

Automatic 93

From inside 93

Switch 94

Unlocking from inside 93, 94

Central locking switch 94

Certification label 292

Charge indicator lamp 254

Charging

Vehicle battery 279

320

Chart

Fuses 287

CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp 248

Checking

Coolant level 215, 222

Oil level 218

Tire inflate pressure 216

Vehicle lighting 216

Checking weights

Trailer and vehicle 208

Checklist

Off-road driving 201

Returning from off-road driving 206

Child safety 67

Airbags 60

Infant and child restraint systems 64,

68

LATCH child seat mounts 72

Child safety switch see Blocking of rear door window operation 73

Cigarette lighter

Front center console 168

Cleaning

Cup holder 238

Gear selector lever 238

Hard plastic trim items 238

Headlamps 131

Headliner 238

Instrument cluster 238

Leather upholstery 239

Light alloy wheels 238

MB Tex upholstery 239

Plastic and rubber parts 239

Seat belts 238

Steering wheel 238

Windows 237

Windshield 50

Wiper blades 237

Clock 26, 118

Index

Closing

Glove box 164

Hood 218

Liftgate 92

Rear quarter windows* 147

Side windows 145

Sliding/pop-up roof* 148, 265

Closing sliding/pop-up roof*

In an emergency 265

Cockpit 22, 311

Combination switch

High beam flasher 49, 110

Turn signals 49


Compass 187

Calibrating 188

Setting compass zone 188

Compass zone 188

Consumer information 308

Control and operation of radio transmitters 211

321

Index

Coolant 222, 304

Adding 223

Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity 304

Checking level 222

Indicator lamp 249

Temperature 213

Temperature gauge 117

Coolant level

Checking 215, 222

Crossing obstacles 204

Cruise control 150, 311

Canceling 151

Driving downhill 151

Driving uphill 151

Fine adjustment 152

LOW RANGE mode 152

Saving current speed 151

Setting speeds 152

Cruise control lever 150

Cup holder 166

Cleaning 238

In front seat armrest 167

In instrument panel 166

In rear centerconsole 167

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 311

D

Daytime running lamp mode 109

Deactivating

Air conditioning (cooling) 139


Alarm 84


Automatic climate control 135, 137

Cruise control 151

Defrost 138

Engine 54

ESP 81

Front fog lamps, rear fog lamp 111


Headlamps 54

Immobilizer 83

Rear passenger compartment ventilation and climate control 141


Residual heat 140

Seat heater* 98

Tow-away alarm 85

Tow-away alarm (vehicles with trip computer*) 85

Tow-away alarm (vehicles without trip computer*) 86

Deactivating automatic central locking 93

Deep water see Standing water 200

Defogging

Windshield 138

Defrosting 138

Difficulties

While driving see Problems while driving 51

With starting 47

Direction of rotation (tires) 227

Discharged battery

Jump starting 281

Disconnecting

Vehicle battery 279

Display in the speedometer 117

322

Display messages

Error 256

Service indicator (FSS) 256

StArt 256

Displays

Messages 219


Distance remaining 189

Door entry lamps 113

Door unlock

With Tele Aid* 179

Doors

Opening from inside vehicle 90

Opening from outside 89

Downhill driving

Cruise control 151

Downshifting 120

Drink holder see Cup holder 167

Drinking and driving 193

Driving 42, 47

Abroad 211

In winter 198

Problems 51

Safety systems 76

Through standing water 200

Driving abroad 211

Driving instructions


Driving off 195

Driving safety systems

4-ETS 79

ABS 76

BAS 78

ESP 80

Driving systems 150

Cruise control 150

Driving safety systems 76

EBP 80

Parktronic* 153

Driving through water 203

Index

E

Easy entry/exit feature* 101

EBP 80

Indicator lamp 245

Economy mode


Electrical connections

Trailer 207

Electrical fuses 287

Electrical outlet 170

Electrical system

Technical data 297

Electrically folding exterior rear view mirrors 128

Electronic Brake Proportioning see EBP

Electronic Stability Program see ESP 25,

80

Electronic stability program see ESP 312

Electronic Traction System see 4-ETS 25

Emergency call system

Requirements 172

Emergency call system* 172

323

Index

Emergency calls

Initiating an emergency call 175

With Tele Aid* 173

Emergency operation (Limp Home

Mode) 124

Emergency operations

Closing sliding/pop-up roof* 265

Locking the vehicle 262

Opening sliding/pop-up roof* 265

Remote door unlock 179

Unlocking the vehicle 261

Emergency tensioning device see

ETD 67, 312

Emission control 212

Emission control label 292

Engine

Starting 46

Technical data 294

Turning off 54

Engine cleaning 236

Engine compartment

Fuse box in 287

Hood 217

Engine malfunction indicator lamp 25,

248

Engine number 311

Engine oil 218, 302

Adding 221

Additives 302

Checking level 218

Consumption 218

Messages in display 219

Oil dipstick 221

Viscosity 312

Enlarged cargo area 99

Error

Display messages 256

ESP 25, 80, 312

LOW RANGE mode 81

Malfunction indicator lamp 245, 246,

247

Switching off 81

Switching on 82

Synchronizing 246

Warning lamp 245, 246, 247, 251

ETD 312


ETD (Emergency tensioning device) 67

Exterior mirrors

Folding 128

Exterior rear view mirrors 40

Adjusting 40

Folding electrically 128

324

Index

F

Fastening the seat belts 42

Fine adjustment

Cruise control 152

First aid kit 257

Flat tire 274

Lowering the vehicle 276

Mounting the spare wheel 274

Preparing the vehicle 274

Spare wheel 259

Flexible Service System (FSS) 232, 312

Fluid level


Fog lamp, rear 267

Fog lamps 111

Replacing bulbs 266

Fog lamps, front

Replacing bulbs 267

Switching on 111

Folding

Exterior mirrors 128

Folding electrically

Exterior rear view mirrors

128

4-ETS 25, 79

Indicator lamp 252

LOW RANGE mode 80

Malfunction indicator lamp 252

Warning lamp 251

Front airbags 63

Front fog lamps

Indicator lamp 253

Front lamps

Replacing bulbs 266, 268

Front towing eyes 285

FSS (Flexible Service System) 232, 312

Fuel 215

Additives 303

Fuel reserve warning lamp 252

Gasoline additives 303

Premium unleaded gasoline 215,

303

Requirements 303

Reserve warning 25

Fuel additives 303

Fuel filler flap 214

Locking 214

Opening 263

Unlocking 214

Fuel requirements 303

Fuel tank

Filler flap 214

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

300

Functions

Trip computer* 186

Fuse box 287, 288

Fuse chart 287

Fuses 287

Fuse box in engine compartment 287

Fuse box in passenger footwell 288

Fuse chart 287

Fuse extractor 287

Spare fuses 287

G

Garage door opener 29, 180

Erasing in remote control 185

Gasoline see Fuel 215


Gauge for

Coolant temperature 25

Fuel 25

Outside temperature 25

325

Index

Gear range 312


Limiting 121

Shifting into optimal 120

Gear range limit

Canceling 120

Gear selector lever

Cleaning 238

Position 122

Glass breakage sensor 84

Global Positioning System (GPS) 312

Glossary 311

Glove box 23, 164

Closing 164

Opening 164

Good visibility 126

GPS 312

H

Hard plastic trim items

Cleaning 238


Switching off 112

Switching on 112

Head restraints

Manual seats 36

Power seats* 38

Headlamp aim

Adjusting 272

Headlamp cleaning system* 224

Headlamps

Automatic control 108

Bi-Xenon* 311

Cleaning 236

Cleaning system* 131, 224

Refilling washer fluid 224

Switching off 54

Switching on 48

Washer fluid 307

Washer system 307

Headliner

Cleaning 238

Heated seats* 98

Height adjustment

Head restraints 36, 38

Seat belts 45

Steering wheel 39

High beam flasher 49, 110

High beam headlamps


Switching on 110

High mounted brake lamp 267

Replacing bulbs 271

Hood 217

Closing 218

Opening 217

Hooks

Loading 159

Hydroplaning 197

326

Index

I

Identification labels 292

Certification label 292

Vehicle identification number

(VIN) 292

Ignition 33

Immobilizer 83

Activating 54, 83

Deactivating 83

Indicator lamp

Adjustable steering column 253

Brake pad wear 254

Coolant 249

Front fog lamps 253

Low engine oil level 253

Indicators, additional

Speedometer display 256

Infant and child restraint systems 68

Installing 71


Information

About service and warranty 10

Button for Tele Aid* 177

Inside rear view mirror

Antiglare 126

Installing


Wiper blades 273

Instrument cluster 24, 116, 313

Cleaning 238

Coolant temperature gauge 117

Display in the speedometer 117

Illumination 116

Lamps in 252

Outside temperature indicator 118

Instruments and controls see Cockpit 22

Integrated remote control

Erasing memory 185

Operating 185

Interior lighting 112

Activating automatic control 113

Deactivating automatic control 113

Manual operation 113

Reading lamps 114

Interior storage spaces 164

Armrest 165

Cup holder 167

Glove box 164

Storage compartment in front of armrest 165

Storage compartment under front passenger seat* 164

Intermittent wiping 130

J

Jack 258

Jump starting 281

327

Index

K

Key

Global locking 89

Global unlocking 89

Loss of 90

Positions in steering lock 33

Remote control with folding key 88

Unlocking liftgate 89

Unlocking the driver’s door, fuel filler flap 89

Key positions in steering lock 33

Key, Mechanical 261

Key, Remote control

Unlocking with 32

Kickdown 123, 313

L

Labels, identification 292

Lamp bulbs, exterior 266

Lamps, exterior

Front 266

Rear 267

Lamps, indicator and warning

4-ETS 251, 252

ABS 242

Adjustable steering column 253

AIRBAG OFF 63, 243

BAS 78, 245, 246, 247

Battery indicator lamp 254

Brake pad wear 254

Brakes 244

CHECK ENGINE 248

Coolant 249

EBP 245

Engine diagnostics 248

ESP 245, 246, 247, 251

Front fog lamps 253

Fuel reserve 252

Low engine oil level 253

LOW RANGE 252

Low washer system fluid level 253

Seat belts 253


SRS 255

Turn signals 25

LATCH child seat anchors 72


Layout of poly-V-belt drive 293

Leather upholstery

Cleaning 239

Lever

For cruise control 150

License plate lamps


Liftgate

Closing 92

Opening 89, 91

Opening from inside 91

Opening from outside 91

Light alloy wheels

Cleaning 238

Lighter

Rear center console 169

Lighter see cigarette lighter 168

328

Index

Lighting 107

Automatic headlamp mode 108

Cargo compartment 114

Combination switch 110

Daytime running lamp mode 109

Door entry lamps 113

Front fog lamps 111

High beam flasher 110

High beams 110

Instrument cluster illumination 116

Interior 112

Locator lighting 110

Night security illumination 109

Limiting the gear range 121

Limp Home Mode 124

Line of fall 313

Loading 157

Cargo area cover blind* 161

Cargo floor plates 162


Hooks 159

Instructions 157, 158

Partition net* 159

Roof rack 163

Split rear bench seat 99

Trailer 208

Locator lighting 110

Lock button 313

Locking 88

Automatic while driving 93

Centrally from inside 94


Global 89

Vehicle in an emergency 262

Locking knobs 32

Loss of keys 90

Loss of Service and Warranty Information

Booklet 291

Low beam headlamps


Switching on 48

Low engine oil level

Indicator lamp 253

LOW RANGE - 4-ETS 80

LOW RANGE - ABS 77

LOW RANGE - ESP 81

LOW RANGE mode 125

Low washer system fluid level

Indicator lamp 253

Lowering

Vehicle 276

M

Main dimensions 298

Maintenance 12


Manual operations


Interior lighting control 113

Locking the vehicle 262

Sliding/pop-up roof* 265

Unlocking the driver’s door 261

Unlocking transmission selector lever 264

329

Index

Manual seat

Adjusting 35

Adjusting backrest tilt 36

Adjusting head restraint height 36

Adjusting head restraint tilt 37, 39


Seat height 36

MB Tex upholstery

Cleaning 239

MCS

Modular Control System 313

Mechanical key 261

Memory function 105, 313

Memory function* 106

Recalling positions from memory 106

Mirror

Inside rear view mirror 40

Mirrors

Activating exterior mirror parking position 127

Adjusting 40

Automatic antiglare for rear view mirror 126

Exterior rear view mirror 40

Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position 106

MON 215

MON (Motor Octane Number) 313

Monitoring reach

Parktronic* 154

Multifunction display 313

N

Night security illumination 109

Deactivation temporarily 109

Setting time 109

O

Occupant safety 58

Children and airbags 60

Children in the vehicle 67

Fastening the seat belt 42



Seat belts 42, 62

Odometer display 117

Odometer, main 25

Off-road driving

Checklist 201, 206

Crossing obstacles 204

Driving instructions off-road driving 200

Driving through water 203

Returning 205

Rules 201

Special driving features 201

Steep terrain 202

330

Index

Oil

Adding 221

Consumption 218

Dipstick 218

Oil dipstick 221

Viscosity 312

One-touch gearshifting 120

Canceling gear range limit 120

Downshifting 120

Upshifting 120

Opening

Doors from the inside 90


Fuel filler flap manually 263

Glove box 164

Hood 217

Liftgate 89, 91

Liftgate from inside 91

Liftgate from outside 91

Rear quarter windows 146

Side windows 145

Sliding/pop-up roof* 148, 265

Sliding/pop-up roof* in an emergency 265

Storage compartment in front of armrest 166

Storage compartment under passenger seat 165

Windows 145

Opening and closing

Side windows 144

Operating

Garage door opener 185

Integrated remote control 185

Radio transmitters 211

Vehicle outside the USA and

Canada 13

Operating safety 17

Operator’s Manual 10

Ornamental moldings 236

Outside temperature indicator 118

Overdue service 233

Overhead control panel 29

P

Paintwork 235

Panic alarm 75

Panic button on remote control 75

Parking and locking 53

Parking brake 47, 53

Engaging 53

Releasing 47

Parking lamps

Replacing bulbs 266, 267, 269

Replacing the bulbs 269

Switching on 107

Parktronic* 153, 313

Cleaning system sensor 237

Monitoring reach 154

Sensor cover 237

Switching off 156

Switching on 156

Warning indicators 155

331

Index

Partition net* 159

Engaging 159

Removing 161

Tightening 160

Parts see Spare parts service

Passenger compartment 211

Interior lighting 112

Passenger footwell

Fuse box in 288

Passenger safety see Occupant safety 58

Pedals 193

Plastic and rubber parts

Cleaning 239

Poly-V-belt drive 314

Layout 293

Positions (Memory function*)

Recalling from memory 106

Storing into memory 106

Power assistance 193

Power seat*

Adjusting backrest tilt 38

Adjusting head restraint height 38

Adjusting seat cushion tilt 38

Adjusting seat height 38


Power seats* 37

Power train 314

Power washer 235

Power windows

Blocking of rear door window operation 73

Side windows 144

Synchronizing 146

Practical hints

First aid kit 257

Fuses 287

Lamps in instrument cluster 242

Spare wheel 259

Towing the vehicle 283

Vehicle jack 258

Vehicle tool kit 257

Premium unleaded gasoline 303

Problems

While driving 51

With vehicle 18

Product information 9

Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control 182

R

Radio transmitters, control and operation 211

Rain sensor* 130, 131

Rapid seat heating

Switching off 99

Rapid seat heating*

Switching on 98

Reading lamp 29

332

Index

Reading lamps 114

Rear automatic climate control 141

Adjusting air volume and air distribution manually 141

Automatic mode 141

Rear bench seat

Foldable 99

Rear door window

Blocking operation 73

Rear fog lamp 267

Bulb 267

Switching on 111

Rear lamp bulbs

Replacing 270

Rear parking lamp

Replacing bulbs 270

Rear passenger compartment ventilation and climate control

Activating 141

Deactivating 141

Rear passenger compartment ventilation and rear automatic climate control 141

Rear quarter windows* 146

Opening 146

Closing 147

Rear seats 99

Easy entry/exit feature* 101

Enlarging cargo area 99

Folding down backrest 100

Folding up 101

Folding up backrest 100

Fore and aft 99

Lowering 100

Third row* 102

Rear standing lamp

Replacing bulbs 270

Rear towing eyes 285

Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 126

Rear view mirrors see Mirrors


Activating 133

Deactivating 133

Rear window wiper 131

Rain sensor* 131

Rear window wiper/washer 51

Reconnecting

Vehicle battery 279

Refrigerant

Air conditioning 302

Refueling 214

Regular checks 215

Reinstalling vehicle battery 279

Remote control

Changing battery 262

Global locking 89

Global unlocking 89

Synchronizing 263

Unlocking liftgate 89

Unlocking the driver’s door, fuel filler flap 89

Unlocking with 32

Remote control with folding key 88

333

Index

Remote door unlock

With Tele Aid* 179

Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 314

Removing

Vehicle battery 279

Wheel 276

Wiper blades 273

Removing spare wheel 259

Replacing

Backup lamp bulbs 270

Brake lamp bulbs 270

Bulbs 266

Front lamp bulbs 268

Front turn signal bulbs 268

Fuses 287

High beam bulbs 269

High mounted brake lamp 271

License plate lamp bulbs 271

Low beam bulbs 268

Rear fog lamp bulbs 270

Rear lamp bulbs 267, 270

Rear parking lamp bulbs 270

Rear side marker lamp bulbs 270

Rear standing lamp bulbs 270

Rear turn signal bulbs 270

Wiper blades 273

334

Replacing front fog lamp bulb 270

Reporting

Safety defects 19

Resetting

Service indicator (FSS) 233

Trip odometer 118

Residual heat utilization 140, 314

Residual ventilation 140

REST (Residual engine heat utilization) 314

Restraint system 314

Restraint system see Infant and child restraint systems 68, 71

Returning from off-road driving 205

Rims 295

Roadside assistance 12

Tele Aid* 175

RON 215

RON (Research Octane Number) 314

Roof rack 163

Rotating wheels 228

Rubber parts

Cleaning 239

S

Safety

Occupant 58

Safety belts see Seat belts 42

Safety defects

Reporting 19

Safety systems

Driving 76

Saving current speed 151

Seat belt force limiter 67

Seat belt height adjustment 45

Seat belts 64

Cleaning 238

Fastening 42

Height adjustment 45

Proper use of 44, 66


Warning lamp 253

Seat heater*

Switching off 98

Switching on 98

Seats 95

Adjusting 34

Heater* 98

Manual 35

Power 37

Rapid seat heating* 98

Rear 99


Securing cargo


Selector lever 26

Lock 46

Position 26, 119

Index

Self-test

BabySmart

TM


Tele Aid* 172

Service

Calling up the service indicator 233

Major service (Service B) 232

Minor service (Service A) 232

Overdue 233

Spare parts

Types 233

When due 232

Service and Warranty Booklet

Loss of 291

Service and warranty information 10


Calling up 233

Clearing 232, 233

Service indicator (FSS)


Service life (tires) 227

Service System see FSS

Setting

Cruise control 151

Higher speed in cruise control 152

Hours (clock) 118

Lower speed in cruise control 152

Minutes (clock) 118

Slower speed in cruise control 152

Speed in cruise control 152

Setting date

Trip computer* 186

Setting language

Trip computer* 190

Shift lock 314

Shifting

Gear selector lever positions 122

Into optimal gear range (automatic transmission) 120

Side impact airbags 64

Side marker lamps


335

Index

Side windows 144

Automatic closing 145

Automatic opening 145

Cleaning 237

Closing 145

Closing fully (Express-close) 145

Opening 145

Opening and closing 144

Opening fully (Express-open) 145

Rear quarter window 146

Stopping 145

Synchronizing power windows 146

Simultaneous wiping and washing



Single wipe 50


Closing 148, 265

Opening 148, 265

Synchronizing 149

Snow chains 231

Spare fuses 287

Spare parts service 290

Spare wheel 259

Mounting 274

Removing 259

Speed

Saving current 151

Speed settings

Cruise control 152

Speedometer 25

Speedometer display

Additional indicators 256


SRS 66, 314

Indicator lamp 255

Standing lamps 107


Standing water

Driving instructions 200

StArt


Starting difficulties 47

Starting position 33

Starting the engine 46

336

Steep terrain

Driving 202

Steering column

Height adjustment 39

Length adjustment 39

Steering lock 23, 33

Positions 33

Steering wheel

Adjusting 39

Adjustment 39

Cleaning 238

Stolen vehicle

Tracking services 180

Stop watch 189

Stopping

Windows 145

Storage compartments

Glove box 164

Under front passenger seat* 164

Storing (Memory function*)

Positions into memory 106

Stranded vehicle 286

Sun visor 132

Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) 314

Switching off


ESP 81


Headlamps 54

Rapid seat heating 99

Transmission control – LOW RANGE mode 125

Switching on


ESP 82

Front fog lamps 111

Front fog lamps, rear fog lamp 111


Headlamps 48

High beams 110

Rapid seat heating* 98

Seat heating* 98


Trip computer* 186


Synchronizing

ESP 246

Power windows 146

Remote control 263


T

Tachometer 26, 118

Displaying gear range 121

Tail lamps 270

Cleaning 236

Replacing bulbs 267

Index

Tar stains 235

Technical data 302

Brake fluid 302

Coolants 304

Electrical system 297

Engine 294

Engine oil 302

Engine oil additives 302

Fuel requirements 303


Main dimensions 298

Premium unleaded gasoline 303

Rims and tires 295

Weights 299

Windshield and headlamp washer system 307

Tele Aid System* 315

337

Index

Tele Aid* 171

Emergency calls 173

Information 177

Initiating an emergency call manually 175

Remote door unlock 179

Roadside assistance 175

Stolen vehicle tracking services 180

System self-check 172

Upgrade signals 178

Telematics* 315

Telephone* 170

Temperature

Grades of tires 309

Tires 228

Third row seats* 102

Folding down single seat 102

Installing single seat 104

Removing single seat 104

Storing single seat 103

Tie-down rings (Cargo compartment) 158

Tightening torque 315

Tightening torque (Wheel bolts) 277

Tilt

Head restraint 37, 39

Time

Setting hours 118

Setting minutes 118

Tire inflation pressure

Checking 216, 227

Tire speed rating 198, 315

Tire traction 197

Tires 295, 308

Direction of rotation 227

Driving instructions 196

Retreads 226

Rims and tires 295

Rotating 228

Service life 227

Temperature 228

Temperature grades 309

Tread depth 230

Wear pattern 228

Winter 230

Tools 257

Vehicle jack 258

Vehicles with CD-changer* 258

Wheel bolt wrench 258

Tow-away alarm 29, 84

Arming 84

Disarming 84

Disarming for transport 84

Towing

Trailer 206



Towing eyes

Front 285

Rear 285

Towing the vehicle 283

Stranded vehicle 286

Tracking services

For stolen vehicle 180

338

Index

Traction 308, 315

Trailer

Attaching 208

Loading 208

Towing 209

Trailer hitches 207

Trailer towing 206

Attaching a trailer 208

Checking weights 208

Electrical connections 207

Hitches 207

Loading 208

Weights and ratings 207

Trailer weights and ratings 207

Transfer case 315


Switching off 125

Switching on 125

Transmission selector lever 264

Unlocking manually 264

Tread depth (tires) 230

Treadwear 308

Trip computer* 29, 186

Average fuel consumption 189

Compass 187

Country 190

Distance remaining 189

Language 190

Selecting functions 186

Setting date 186

Stop watch 189

Switching on 186

Trip odometer

Resetting 118

Trip odometer display 117

Trunk see Cargo compartment 89

Turn signal lamps


Turn signals 49

Additional in mirrors 266

Cleaning lenses 236

Front bulbs 266

Indicator lamps 25

Rear bulbs 267, 270

Turning off

Engine 54

U

Unlocking 32, 88

Centrally from inside 94

Driver’s door in an emergency 261

Driver’s door, fuel filler flap 89


In an emergency 261

Transmission selector lever manually 264

Vehicle in an emergency 179

With the remote control 32

Upgrade signals

Tele Aid* 178

Uphill driving

Cruise control 151

Upholstery

Cleaning 239

Upshifting 120

339

Index

Useful features 164

Ashtrays and cigarette lighter 168

Cup holder 166

Electrical outlet 170

Garage door opener 180

Interior storage spaces 164

Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control 182

Tele Aid* 171

Telephone* 170

Trip computer* 186

V

Vehicle

Locking 28

Locking in an emergency 262

Lowering 276

Proper use of 17

Service battery 278

Towing 283

Unlocking 28

Unlocking in an emergency 261

Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings 207

Vehicle battery 278

Vehicle care

Cup holder 238

Engine cleaning 236

Gear selector lever 238

Hard plastic trim items 238

Headlamps 236

Instrument cluster 238

Leather upholstery 239

Light alloy wheels 238

MB Tex upholstery 239

Ornamental moldings 236

Paintwork 235

Parktronic* system sensor 237

Plastic and rubber parts 239

Power washer 235

Seat belts 238

Steering wheel 238

Tail lamps 236

Tar stains 235

Turn signals 236

Upholstery 239

Vehicle washing 236

Window cleaning 237

Wiper blades 237

Vehicle identification number (VIN) 292

Vehicle jack 258

Vehicle lighting

Checking 216

Vehicle tool kit 257

Vehicle with CD-changer* 258

Vehicle washing 236

VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 292,

315

Voice control system* 315

W

Warning indicators

Parktronic* 155

Warning sounds

Drivers seat belts 64

Parking brake 48

Warranty coverage 291

Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid

Washing the vehicle 234

340

Wear pattern (tires) 228

Weights 299

Wheel bolt wrench 258

Wheel change

Tightening torque 277

Wheels

Rotating 228

Window curtain airbags 64

Windows see Side windows

Windshield

Defogging 138

Refilling washer fluid 224

Replacing wiper blades 273

Washer fluid 224, 307

Washer system 307

Windshield washer fluid 307

Filler neck 224

Mixing ratio 307

Refilling 224

Wiping with 50

Index

Windshield washer system 307

Windshield wipers 49, 129

Intermittent 49

Interval wiping 130

Normal wiper speed 49

Rain sensor* 130


Replacing wiper blades 273

Simultaneous wiping and washing 51

Single wipe 50

Switching on 49

Wiping with windshield washer fluid 50

Winter driving

Snow chains 231

Tires 230

Winter driving instructions 198

Winter tires 230

Wiper blades

Cleaning 237

Installing 273

Removing 273

Replacing 273

Wiper switch 49

Wiper/washer

Rear window 51

Wiping

And washing simultaneously 50

Intermittent 49, 130

With windshield washer fluid 50

Wiping and washing simultaneously 51

X

Xenon headlamps*

Bi-Xenon* 311

341

342

Service and Literature

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.

For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.

Warning!

G

To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.

If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual.

Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.

Title illustration no. P00.01-2273-31

Press time 08/20 /03

GSP/TIP

Printed in Germany